In a couple functions (type_update_when_use_rtti_test and
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
711 @ifset UsesEnvVars
712 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
713 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
714 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715 @end ifset
716
717 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721 @cindex emulation
722 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
723 @item -m @var{emulation}
724 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731 configured.
732
733 @cindex link map
734 @kindex -M
735 @kindex --print-map
736 @item -M
737 @itemx --print-map
738 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739 information about the link, including the following:
740
741 @itemize @bullet
742 @item
743 Where object files are mapped into memory.
744 @item
745 How common symbols are allocated.
746 @item
747 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
749 @item
750 The values assigned to symbols.
751
752 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758 linker script containing:
759
760 @smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764 @end smallexample
765
766 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767 option is used:
768
769 @smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773 @end smallexample
774
775 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776 scripts.
777 @end itemize
778
779 @kindex -n
780 @cindex read-only text
781 @cindex NMAGIC
782 @kindex --nmagic
783 @item -n
784 @itemx --nmagic
785 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
788
789 @kindex -N
790 @kindex --omagic
791 @cindex read/write from cmd line
792 @cindex OMAGIC
793 @item -N
794 @itemx --omagic
795 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
796 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
798 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800 specification published by Microsoft.
801
802 @kindex --no-omagic
803 @cindex OMAGIC
804 @item --no-omagic
805 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
809
810 @kindex -o @var{output}
811 @kindex --output=@var{output}
812 @cindex naming the output file
813 @item -o @var{output}
814 @itemx --output=@var{output}
815 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
816 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819 @kindex -O @var{level}
820 @cindex generating optimized output
821 @item -O @var{level}
822 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
823 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
824 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
829
830 @kindex -q
831 @kindex --emit-relocs
832 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
833 @item -q
834 @itemx --emit-relocs
835 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
836 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
837 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
838 in larger executables.
839
840 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
841
842 @kindex --force-dynamic
843 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
844 @item --force-dynamic
845 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
846 to VxWorks targets.
847
848 @cindex partial link
849 @cindex relocatable output
850 @kindex -r
851 @kindex --relocatable
852 @item -r
853 @itemx --relocatable
854 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
855 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
856 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
857 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
858 @code{OMAGIC}.
859 @c ; see @option{-N}.
860 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
861 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
862 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
863
864 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
865 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
866 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
867 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
868 with input files in other formats at all.
869
870 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
871
872 @kindex -R @var{file}
873 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
874 @cindex symbol-only input
875 @item -R @var{filename}
876 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
877 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
878 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
879 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
880 programs. You may use this option more than once.
881
882 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
883 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
884 the @option{-rpath} option.
885
886 @kindex -s
887 @kindex --strip-all
888 @cindex strip all symbols
889 @item -s
890 @itemx --strip-all
891 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
892
893 @kindex -S
894 @kindex --strip-debug
895 @cindex strip debugger symbols
896 @item -S
897 @itemx --strip-debug
898 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
899
900 @kindex -t
901 @kindex --trace
902 @cindex input files, displaying
903 @item -t
904 @itemx --trace
905 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
906
907 @kindex -T @var{script}
908 @kindex --script=@var{script}
909 @cindex script files
910 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
911 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
912 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
913 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
914 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
915 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
916 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
917 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
918 options accumulate.
919
920 @kindex -dT @var{script}
921 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
922 @cindex script files
923 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
924 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
925 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
926
927 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
928 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
929 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
930 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
931 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
932 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
933 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
934 @samp{gcc}).
935
936 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
937 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
938 @cindex undefined symbol
939 @item -u @var{symbol}
940 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
941 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
942 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
943 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
944 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
945 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
946
947 @kindex -Ur
948 @cindex constructors
949 @item -Ur
950 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
951 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
952 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
953 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
954 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
955 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
956 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
957 @samp{-r} for the others.
958
959 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
962 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
963 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
964 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
965 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
966 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
967 in a linker script.
968
969 @kindex -v
970 @kindex -V
971 @kindex --version
972 @cindex version
973 @item -v
974 @itemx --version
975 @itemx -V
976 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
977 lists the supported emulations.
978
979 @kindex -x
980 @kindex --discard-all
981 @cindex deleting local symbols
982 @item -x
983 @itemx --discard-all
984 Delete all local symbols.
985
986 @kindex -X
987 @kindex --discard-locals
988 @cindex local symbols, deleting
989 @item -X
990 @itemx --discard-locals
991 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
992 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
993 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
994
995 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
996 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997 @cindex symbol tracing
998 @item -y @var{symbol}
999 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1000 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1001 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1002 to prepend an underscore.
1003
1004 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1005 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1006
1007 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1008 @item -Y @var{path}
1009 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1010 for Solaris compatibility.
1011
1012 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1013 @item -z @var{keyword}
1014 The recognized keywords are:
1015 @table @samp
1016
1017 @item combreloc
1018 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1019 lookup caching possible.
1020
1021 @item defs
1022 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1023 shared libraries are still allowed.
1024
1025 @item execstack
1026 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1027
1028 @item global
1029 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1030 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1031 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1032
1033 @item initfirst
1034 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1035 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1036 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1037 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1038 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1039 objects.
1040
1041 @item interpose
1042 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1043 but the primary executable.
1044
1045 @item lazy
1046 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1047 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1048 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1049 Lazy binding is the default.
1050
1051 @item loadfltr
1052 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1053 runtime.
1054
1055 @item muldefs
1056 Allows multiple definitions.
1057
1058 @item nocombreloc
1059 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1060
1061 @item nocopyreloc
1062 Disables production of copy relocs.
1063
1064 @item nodefaultlib
1065 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1066 ignore any default library search paths.
1067
1068 @item nodelete
1069 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1070
1071 @item nodlopen
1072 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1073
1074 @item nodump
1075 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1076
1077 @item noexecstack
1078 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1079
1080 @item norelro
1081 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1082
1083 @item now
1084 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1085 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1086 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1087 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1088 first called.
1089
1090 @item origin
1091 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1092
1093 @item relro
1094 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1095
1096 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1097 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1098
1099 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1100 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1101
1102 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1103 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1104 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1105 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1106
1107 @end table
1108
1109 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1110
1111 @kindex -(
1112 @cindex groups of archives
1113 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1114 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1115 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1116 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1117
1118 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1119 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1120 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1121 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1122 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1123 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1124 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1125 resolved.
1126
1127 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1128 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1129 more archives.
1130
1131 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1134 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1135 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1136 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1137 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1138 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1139 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1140 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1141 restore the old behaviour.
1142
1143 @kindex --as-needed
1144 @kindex --no-as-needed
1145 @item --as-needed
1146 @itemx --no-as-needed
1147 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1148 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1149 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1150 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1151 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1152 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1153 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1154 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1155 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1156 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1157 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1158 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1159 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1160
1161 @kindex --add-needed
1162 @kindex --no-add-needed
1163 @item --add-needed
1164 @itemx --no-add-needed
1165 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1166 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1167 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1168 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1169
1170 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1171 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1172 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1173
1174 @kindex -Bdynamic
1175 @kindex -dy
1176 @kindex -call_shared
1177 @item -Bdynamic
1178 @itemx -dy
1179 @itemx -call_shared
1180 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1181 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1182 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1183 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1184 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1185 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1186
1187 @kindex -Bgroup
1188 @item -Bgroup
1189 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1190 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1191 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1192 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1193 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1194
1195 @kindex -Bstatic
1196 @kindex -dn
1197 @kindex -non_shared
1198 @kindex -static
1199 @item -Bstatic
1200 @itemx -dn
1201 @itemx -non_shared
1202 @itemx -static
1203 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1204 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1205 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1206 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1207 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1208 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1209 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1210 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1211 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1212 libraries.
1213
1214 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1215 @item -Bsymbolic
1216 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1217 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1218 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1219 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1220 platforms which support shared libraries.
1221
1222 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1223 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1224 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1225 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1226 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1227 libraries.
1228
1229 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1230 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1231 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1232 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1233 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1234 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1235 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1236 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1237 which support shared libraries.
1238
1239 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1240 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1241
1242 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1243 @item --dynamic-list-data
1244 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1245
1246 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1247 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1248 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1249 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1250
1251 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1252 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1253 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1254
1255 @kindex --check-sections
1256 @kindex --no-check-sections
1257 @item --check-sections
1258 @itemx --no-check-sections
1259 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1260 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1261 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1262 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1263 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1264 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1265 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1266 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1267 option.
1268
1269 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1271 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1272 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1273 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1274 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1275 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1276 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1277 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1278 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1279 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1280 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1281
1282 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1283 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1284 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1285 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1286 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1287 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1288 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1289 symbols.
1290
1291 @cindex cross reference table
1292 @kindex --cref
1293 @item --cref
1294 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1295 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1296 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1297
1298 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1299 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1300 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1301 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1302 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1303 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1304 symbol are listed.
1305
1306 @cindex common allocation
1307 @kindex --no-define-common
1308 @item --no-define-common
1309 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1310 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1311 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1312
1313 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1314 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1315 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1316 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1317 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1318 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1319 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1320 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1321 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1322 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1323
1324 @cindex symbols, from command line
1325 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1326 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1327 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1328 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1329 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1330 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1331 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1332 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1333 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1334 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1335 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1336 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1337 @var{expression}.
1338
1339 @cindex demangling, from command line
1340 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1341 @kindex --no-demangle
1342 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1343 @itemx --no-demangle
1344 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1345 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1346 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1347 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1348 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1349 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1350 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1351 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1352 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1353
1354 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1355 @kindex -I@var{file}
1356 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1357 @item -I@var{file}
1358 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1359 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1360 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1361 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1362 doing.
1363
1364 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1365 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1366 @item --fatal-warnings
1367 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1368 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1369 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1370
1371 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1372 @item --force-exe-suffix
1373 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1374
1375 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1376 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1377 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1378 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1379 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1380 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1381
1382 @kindex --gc-sections
1383 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1384 @cindex garbage collection
1385 @item --gc-sections
1386 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1387 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1388 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1389 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1390 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1391
1392 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1393 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1394 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1395 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1396 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1397 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1398 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1399 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1400 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1401
1402 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1403 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1404 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1405 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1406
1407 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1408 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1409 @cindex garbage collection
1410 @item --print-gc-sections
1411 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1412 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1413 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1414 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1415 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1416 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1417 line.
1418
1419 @kindex --print-output-format
1420 @cindex output format
1421 @item --print-output-format
1422 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1423 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1424 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1425
1426 @cindex help
1427 @cindex usage
1428 @kindex --help
1429 @item --help
1430 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1431
1432 @kindex --target-help
1433 @item --target-help
1434 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1435
1436 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1437 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1438 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1439 @option{-M} option, above.
1440
1441 @cindex memory usage
1442 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1443 @item --no-keep-memory
1444 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1445 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1446 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1447 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1448 while linking a large executable.
1449
1450 @kindex --no-undefined
1451 @kindex -z defs
1452 @item --no-undefined
1453 @itemx -z defs
1454 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1455 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1456 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1457 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1458 libraries being linked in.
1459
1460 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1461 @kindex -z muldefs
1462 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1463 @itemx -z muldefs
1464 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1465 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1466 first definition will be used.
1467
1468 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1469 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1470 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1471 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1472 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1473 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1474 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1475 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1476 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1477
1478 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1479 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1480 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1481 a shared library.
1482
1483 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1484 libraries specified at link time are that:
1485
1486 @itemize @bullet
1487 @item
1488 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1489 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1490 resolvable at load time.
1491 @item
1492 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1493 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1494
1495 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1496 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1497 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1498 appropriate memset function.
1499 @end itemize
1500
1501 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1502 @item --no-undefined-version
1503 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1504 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1505 will be issued instead.
1506
1507 @kindex --default-symver
1508 @item --default-symver
1509 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1510 exported symbols.
1511
1512 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1513 @item --default-imported-symver
1514 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1515 imported symbols.
1516
1517 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1518 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1519 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1520 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1521 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1522 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1523 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1524 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1525 inappropriate.
1526
1527 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1528 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1529 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1530 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1531
1532 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1533 @item --no-whole-archive
1534 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1535 archive files.
1536
1537 @cindex output file after errors
1538 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1539 @item --noinhibit-exec
1540 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1541 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1542 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1543 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1544
1545 @kindex -nostdlib
1546 @item -nostdlib
1547 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1548 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1549 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1550
1551 @ifclear SingleFormat
1552 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1553 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1554 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1555 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1556 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1557 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1558 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1559 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1560 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1561 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1562 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1563 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1564 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1565 @end ifclear
1566
1567 @kindex -pie
1568 @kindex --pic-executable
1569 @item -pie
1570 @itemx --pic-executable
1571 @cindex position independent executables
1572 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1573 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1574 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1575 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1576 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1577 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1578
1579 @kindex -qmagic
1580 @item -qmagic
1581 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1582
1583 @kindex -Qy
1584 @item -Qy
1585 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1586
1587 @kindex --relax
1588 @cindex synthesizing linker
1589 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1590 @cindex --no-relax
1591 @item --relax
1592 @itemx --no-relax
1593 An option with machine dependent effects.
1594 @ifset GENERIC
1595 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1596 @end ifset
1597 @ifset H8300
1598 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1599 @end ifset
1600 @ifset I960
1601 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1602 @end ifset
1603 @ifset XTENSA
1604 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1605 @end ifset
1606 @ifset M68HC11
1607 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1608 @end ifset
1609 @ifset NIOSII
1610 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1611 @end ifset
1612 @ifset POWERPC
1613 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1614 @end ifset
1615
1616 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1617 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1618 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1619 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1620 instructions, and combining constant values.
1621
1622 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1623 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1624 @ifset GENERIC
1625 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1626 family of processors.
1627 @end ifset
1628
1629 @ifset GENERIC
1630 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1631 but ignored.
1632 @end ifset
1633
1634 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1635 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1636
1637 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1638 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1639 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1640 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1641 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1642 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1643 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1644 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1645 @ifset GENERIC
1646 (such as VxWorks)
1647 @end ifset
1648 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1649 run-time memory.
1650
1651 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1652 or symbols needed for relocations.
1653
1654 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1655 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1656
1657 @ifset GENERIC
1658 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1659 @cindex runtime library search path
1660 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1661 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1662 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1663 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1664 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1665 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1666 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1667 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1668 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1669 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1670
1671 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1672 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1673 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1674 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1675 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1676 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1677 file systems.
1678
1679 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1680 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1681 the @option{-rpath} option.
1682 @end ifset
1683
1684 @ifset GENERIC
1685 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1686 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1687 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1688 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1689 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1690 of the input files.
1691
1692 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1693 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1694 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1695 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1696 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1697 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1698 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1699 appearing multiple times.
1700
1701 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1702 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1703 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1704 runtime linker would do.
1705
1706 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1707 libraries:
1708 @enumerate
1709 @item
1710 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1711 @item
1712 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1713 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1714 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1715 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1716 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1717 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1718 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1719 @item
1720 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1721 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1722 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1723 @item
1724 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1725 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1726 @item
1727 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1728 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1729 @item
1730 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1731 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1732 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1733 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1734 @item
1735 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1736 @item
1737 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1738 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1739 @end enumerate
1740
1741 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1742 warning and continue with the link.
1743 @end ifset
1744
1745 @kindex -shared
1746 @kindex -Bshareable
1747 @item -shared
1748 @itemx -Bshareable
1749 @cindex shared libraries
1750 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1751 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1752 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1753 undefined symbols in the link.
1754
1755 @kindex --sort-common
1756 @item --sort-common
1757 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1758 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1759 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1760 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1761 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1762 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1763 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1764 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1765
1766 @kindex --sort-section=name
1767 @item --sort-section=name
1768 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1769 patterns in the linker script.
1770
1771 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1772 @item --sort-section=alignment
1773 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1774 patterns in the linker script.
1775
1776 @kindex --split-by-file
1777 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1778 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1779 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1780 size of 1 if not given.
1781
1782 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1783 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1784 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1785 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1786 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1787 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1788 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1789 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1790 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1791 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1792 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1793 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1794
1795 @kindex --stats
1796 @item --stats
1797 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1798 as execution time and memory usage.
1799
1800 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1801 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1802 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1803 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1804 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1805
1806 @kindex --traditional-format
1807 @cindex traditional format
1808 @item --traditional-format
1809 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1810 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1811 use the traditional format instead.
1812
1813 @cindex dbx
1814 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1815 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1816 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1817 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1818 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1819 combine duplicate entries.
1820
1821 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1822 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1823 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1824 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1825 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1826 line.
1827 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1828 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1829 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1830 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1831 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1832
1833 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1834 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1835 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1836 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1837 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1838 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1839 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1840 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1841 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1842
1843 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1844 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1845 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1846 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1847 byte of the text segment.
1848
1849 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1850 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1851 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1852 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1853 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1854 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1855
1856 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1857 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1858 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1859 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1860 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1861
1862 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1863 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1864 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1865 values for @samp{method}:
1866
1867 @table @samp
1868 @item ignore-all
1869 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1870
1871 @item report-all
1872 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1873
1874 @item ignore-in-object-files
1875 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1876 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1877
1878 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1879 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1880 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1881 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1882 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1883 command line.
1884 @end table
1885
1886 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1887 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1888
1889 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1890 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1891 can change this to a warning.
1892
1893 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1894 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1895 @item --dll-verbose
1896 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1897 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1898 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1899 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1900 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1901
1902 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1903 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1904 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1905 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1906 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1907 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1908 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1909 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1910 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1911 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1912 @xref{WIN32}.
1913
1914 @kindex --warn-common
1915 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1916 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1917 @item --warn-common
1918 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1919 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1920 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1921 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1922 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1923 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1924
1925 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1926
1927 @table @samp
1928 @item int i = 1;
1929 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1930 file.
1931
1932 @item extern int i;
1933 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1934 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1935 variable somewhere.
1936
1937 @item int i;
1938 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1939 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1940 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1941 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1942 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1943 a definition of the same variable.
1944 @end table
1945
1946 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1947 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1948 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1949 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1950 a common symbol.
1951
1952 @enumerate
1953 @item
1954 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1955 definition for the symbol.
1956 @smallexample
1957 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1958 overridden by definition
1959 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1960 @end smallexample
1961
1962 @item
1963 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1964 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1965 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1966 @smallexample
1967 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1968 overriding common
1969 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1970 @end smallexample
1971
1972 @item
1973 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1974 @smallexample
1975 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1976 of `@var{symbol}'
1977 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1978 @end smallexample
1979
1980 @item
1981 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1982 @smallexample
1983 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1984 overridden by larger common
1985 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1986 @end smallexample
1987
1988 @item
1989 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1990 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1991 encountered in a different order.
1992 @smallexample
1993 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1994 overriding smaller common
1995 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1996 @end smallexample
1997 @end enumerate
1998
1999 @kindex --warn-constructors
2000 @item --warn-constructors
2001 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2002 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2003 detect the use of global constructors.
2004
2005 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2006 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2007 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2008 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2009 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2010 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2011 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2012 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2013 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2014 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2015 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2016 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2017 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2018
2019 @kindex --warn-once
2020 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2021 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2022 @item --warn-once
2023 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2024 which refers to it.
2025
2026 @kindex --warn-section-align
2027 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2028 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2029 @item --warn-section-align
2030 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2031 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2032 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2033 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2034 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2035
2036 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2037 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2038 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2039
2040 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2041 @item --warn-alternate-em
2042 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2043
2044 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2045 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2046 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2047 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2048 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2049
2050 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2051 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2052 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2053 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2054
2055 @kindex --whole-archive
2056 @cindex including an entire archive
2057 @item --whole-archive
2058 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2059 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2060 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2061 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2062 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2063 library. This option may be used more than once.
2064
2065 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2066 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2067 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2068 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2069 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2070
2071 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2072 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2073 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2074 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2075 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2076 @var{symbol}.
2077
2078 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2079 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2080 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2081 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2082
2083 Here is a trivial example:
2084
2085 @smallexample
2086 void *
2087 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2088 @{
2089 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2090 return __real_malloc (c);
2091 @}
2092 @end smallexample
2093
2094 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2095 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2096 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2097 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2098
2099 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2100 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2101 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2102 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2103 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2104
2105 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2106 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2107 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2108 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2109
2110 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2111 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2112 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2113 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2114 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2115
2116 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2117 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2118 @item --enable-new-dtags
2119 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2120 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2121 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2122 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2123 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2124 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2125 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2126 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2127
2128 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2129 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2130 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2131 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2132 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2133 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2134 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2135
2136 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2137 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2138 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2139 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2140 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2141 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2142 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2143
2144 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2145 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2146 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2147 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2148 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2149 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2150
2151 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2152 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2153 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2154 has been used.
2155
2156 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2157 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2158
2159 @kindex --build-id
2160 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2161 @item --build-id
2162 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2163 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2164 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2165 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2166 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2167 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2168 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2169 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2170 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2171 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2172 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2173
2174 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2175 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2176 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2177 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2178 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2179 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2180
2181 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2182 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2183 @end table
2184
2185 @c man end
2186
2187 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2188
2189 @c man begin OPTIONS
2190
2191 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2192 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2193 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2194 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2195 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2196 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2197 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2198 object file).
2199
2200 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2201 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2202 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2203 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2204
2205 @table @gcctabopt
2206
2207 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2208 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2209 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2210 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2211 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2212
2213 @kindex --base-file
2214 @item --base-file @var{file}
2215 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2216 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2217 @file{dlltool}.
2218 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2219
2220 @kindex --dll
2221 @item --dll
2222 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2223 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2224 file.
2225 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2226
2227 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2228 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2229 @item --enable-long-section-names
2230 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2231 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2232 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2233 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2234 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2235 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2236 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2237 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2238 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2239 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2240 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2241 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2242 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2243 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2244 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2245 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2246 image and not stripping symbols.
2247 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2248
2249 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2250 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2251 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2252 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2253 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2254 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2255 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2256 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2257 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2258 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2259 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2260 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2261 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2262 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2263 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2264 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2265 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2266 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2267
2268 @kindex --leading-underscore
2269 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2270 @item --leading-underscore
2271 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2272 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2273 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2274 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2275
2276 @cindex DLLs, creating
2277 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2278 @item --export-all-symbols
2279 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2280 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2281 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2282 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2283 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2284 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2285 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2286 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2287 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2288 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2289 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2290 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2291 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2292 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2293 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2294 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2295 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2296 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2297 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2298 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2299 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2300 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2301 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2302
2303 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2304 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2305 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2306 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2307 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
2309 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2310 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2311 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2312 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
2314 @kindex --file-alignment
2315 @item --file-alignment
2316 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2317 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2318 512.
2319 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2320
2321 @cindex heap size
2322 @kindex --heap
2323 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2324 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2325 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2326 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2327 committed.
2328 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2329
2330 @cindex image base
2331 @kindex --image-base
2332 @item --image-base @var{value}
2333 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2334 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2335 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2336 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2337 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2338 for dlls.
2339 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2340
2341 @kindex --kill-at
2342 @item --kill-at
2343 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2344 symbols before they are exported.
2345 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2346
2347 @kindex --large-address-aware
2348 @item --large-address-aware
2349 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2350 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2351 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2352 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2353 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2354 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2355
2356 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2357 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2358 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2359 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2360 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2361 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2362 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2363
2364 @kindex --major-image-version
2365 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2366 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2367 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2368
2369 @kindex --major-os-version
2370 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2371 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2372 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2373
2374 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2375 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2376 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2377 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2378
2379 @kindex --minor-image-version
2380 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2381 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2382 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2383
2384 @kindex --minor-os-version
2385 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2386 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2387 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2388
2389 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2390 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2391 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2392 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2393
2394 @cindex DEF files, creating
2395 @cindex DLLs, creating
2396 @kindex --output-def
2397 @item --output-def @var{file}
2398 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2399 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2400 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2401 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2402 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2403 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2404
2405 @cindex DLLs, creating
2406 @kindex --out-implib
2407 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2408 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2409 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2410 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2411 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2412 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2413 creation step.
2414 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2415
2416 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2417 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2418 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2419 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2420 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2421 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2422 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2423 execution are avoided.
2424 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2425
2426 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2427 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2428 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2429 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2430 default.
2431 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2432
2433 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2434 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2435 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2436 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2437 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2438 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2439 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2440 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2441 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2442 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2443
2444 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2445 @item --enable-auto-import
2446 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2447 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2448 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2449 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2450 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2451 specification published by Microsoft.
2452
2453 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2454 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2455 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2456 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2457 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2458
2459 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2460 see this message:
2461
2462 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2463 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2464
2465 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2466 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2467 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2468 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2469 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2470 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2471 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2472 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2473 the warning, and exit.
2474
2475 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2476 data type of the exported variable:
2477
2478 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2479 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2480 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2481
2482 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2483 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2484 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2485 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2486
2487 @example
2488 extern type extern_array[];
2489 extern_array[1] -->
2490 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2491 @end example
2492
2493 or
2494
2495 @example
2496 extern type extern_array[];
2497 extern_array[1] -->
2498 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2499 @end example
2500
2501 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2502 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2503
2504 @example
2505 extern struct s extern_struct;
2506 extern_struct.field -->
2507 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2508 @end example
2509
2510 or
2511
2512 @example
2513 extern long long extern_ll;
2514 extern_ll -->
2515 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2516 @end example
2517
2518 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2519 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2520 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2521 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2522 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2523 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2524 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2525 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2526
2527 Original:
2528 @example
2529 --foo.h
2530 extern int arr[];
2531 --foo.c
2532 #include "foo.h"
2533 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2534 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2535 @}
2536 @end example
2537
2538 Solution 1:
2539 @example
2540 --foo.h
2541 extern int arr[];
2542 --foo.c
2543 #include "foo.h"
2544 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2545 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2546 volatile int *parr = arr;
2547 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2548 @}
2549 @end example
2550
2551 Solution 2:
2552 @example
2553 --foo.h
2554 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2555 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2556 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2557 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2558 #else
2559 #define FOO_IMPORT
2560 #endif
2561 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2562 --foo.c
2563 #include "foo.h"
2564 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2565 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2566 @}
2567 @end example
2568
2569 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2570 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2571 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2572 functions).
2573 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2574
2575 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2576 @item --disable-auto-import
2577 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2578 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2579 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2580
2581 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2582 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2583 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2584 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2585 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2586 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2587 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2588
2589 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2590 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2591 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2592 DLLs.
2593 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2594
2595 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2596 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2597 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2598 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2599
2600 @kindex --section-alignment
2601 @item --section-alignment
2602 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2603 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2604 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2605
2606 @cindex stack size
2607 @kindex --stack
2608 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2609 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2610 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2611 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2612 committed.
2613 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2614
2615 @kindex --subsystem
2616 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2617 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2618 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2619 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2620 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2621 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2622 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2623 @var{which}.
2624 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2625
2626 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2627 of the PE file header:
2628 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2629
2630 @kindex --dynamicbase
2631 @item --dynamicbase
2632 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2633 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2634 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2635
2636 @kindex --forceinteg
2637 @item --forceinteg
2638 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2639
2640 @kindex --nxcompat
2641 @item --nxcompat
2642 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2643 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2644
2645 @kindex --no-isolation
2646 @item --no-isolation
2647 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2648
2649 @kindex --no-seh
2650 @item --no-seh
2651 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2652 this image.
2653
2654 @kindex --no-bind
2655 @item --no-bind
2656 Do not bind this image.
2657
2658 @kindex --wdmdriver
2659 @item --wdmdriver
2660 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2661
2662 @kindex --tsaware
2663 @item --tsaware
2664 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2665
2666 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2667 @item --insert-timestamp
2668 Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default value
2669 of zero. This will result in a slightly different results with each
2670 invocation, which could be helpful for distributing unique images.
2671 @end table
2672
2673 @c man end
2674
2675 @ifset C6X
2676 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2677
2678 @c man begin OPTIONS
2679
2680 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2681 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2682 all executables use an index of 0.
2683
2684 @table @gcctabopt
2685
2686 @kindex --dsbt-size
2687 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2688 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2689 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2690 entries.
2691
2692 @kindex --dsbt-index
2693 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2694 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2695 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2696 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2697 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2698
2699 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2700 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2701 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2702
2703 @end table
2704
2705 @c man end
2706 @end ifset
2707
2708 @ifset M68HC11
2709 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2710
2711 @c man begin OPTIONS
2712
2713 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2714 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2715
2716 @table @gcctabopt
2717
2718 @kindex --no-trampoline
2719 @item --no-trampoline
2720 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2721 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2722 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2723
2724 @kindex --bank-window
2725 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2726 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2727 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2728 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2729 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2730
2731 @end table
2732
2733 @c man end
2734 @end ifset
2735
2736 @ifset M68K
2737 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2738
2739 @c man begin OPTIONS
2740
2741 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2742 when linking for 68K targets.
2743
2744 @table @gcctabopt
2745
2746 @kindex --got
2747 @item --got=@var{type}
2748 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2749 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2750 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2751 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2752
2753 @end table
2754
2755 @c man end
2756 @end ifset
2757
2758 @ifset MIPS
2759 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2760
2761 @c man begin OPTIONS
2762
2763 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2764 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2765
2766 @table @gcctabopt
2767
2768 @kindex --insn32
2769 @item --insn32
2770 @kindex --no-insn32
2771 @itemx --no-insn32
2772 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2773 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2774 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2775 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2776 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2777 possible.
2778
2779 @end table
2780
2781 @c man end
2782 @end ifset
2783
2784 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2785 @node Environment
2786 @section Environment Variables
2787
2788 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2789
2790 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2791 @ifclear SingleFormat
2792 @code{GNUTARGET},
2793 @end ifclear
2794 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2795
2796 @ifclear SingleFormat
2797 @kindex GNUTARGET
2798 @cindex default input format
2799 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2800 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2801 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2802 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2803 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2804 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2805 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2806 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2807 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2808 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2809 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2810 @end ifclear
2811
2812 @kindex LDEMULATION
2813 @cindex default emulation
2814 @cindex emulation, default
2815 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2816 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2817 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2818 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2819 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2820 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2821 linker was configured.
2822
2823 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2824 @cindex demangling, default
2825 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2826 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2827 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2828 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2829 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2830 options.
2831
2832 @c man end
2833 @end ifset
2834
2835 @node Scripts
2836 @chapter Linker Scripts
2837
2838 @cindex scripts
2839 @cindex linker scripts
2840 @cindex command files
2841 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2842 written in the linker command language.
2843
2844 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2845 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2846 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2847 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2848 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2849 described below.
2850
2851 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2852 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2853 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2854 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2855 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2856
2857 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2858 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2859 default linker script.
2860
2861 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2862 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2863 Linker Scripts}.
2864
2865 @menu
2866 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2867 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2868 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2869 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2870 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2871 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2872 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2873 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2874 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2875 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2876 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2877 @end menu
2878
2879 @node Basic Script Concepts
2880 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2881 @cindex linker script concepts
2882 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2883 describe the linker script language.
2884
2885 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2886 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2887 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2888 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2889 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2890 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2891 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2892 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2893
2894 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2895 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2896 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2897 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2898 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2899 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2900 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2901 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2902 of debugging information.
2903
2904 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2905 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2906 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2907 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2908 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2909 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2910 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2911 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2912 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2913 RAM address would be the VMA.
2914
2915 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2916 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2917
2918 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2919 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2920 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2921 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2922 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2923 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2924 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2925
2926 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2927 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2928 option.
2929
2930 @node Script Format
2931 @section Linker Script Format
2932 @cindex linker script format
2933 Linker scripts are text files.
2934
2935 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2936 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2937 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2938 generally ignored.
2939
2940 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2941 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2942 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2943 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2944 file name.
2945
2946 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2947 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2948 to whitespace.
2949
2950 @node Simple Example
2951 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2952 @cindex linker script example
2953 @cindex example of linker script
2954 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2955
2956 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2957 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2958 memory layout of the output file.
2959
2960 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2961 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2962 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2963 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2964 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2965 your input files.
2966
2967 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2968 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2969 linker script which will do that:
2970 @smallexample
2971 SECTIONS
2972 @{
2973 . = 0x10000;
2974 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2975 . = 0x8000000;
2976 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2977 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2978 @}
2979 @end smallexample
2980
2981 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2982 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2983 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2984
2985 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2986 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2987 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2988 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2989 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2990 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2991 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2992
2993 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2994 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2995 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2996 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2997 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2998 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2999
3000 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3001 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3002 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3003
3004 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3005 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3006 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3007 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3008 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3009 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3010 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3011
3012 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3013 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3014 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3015 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3016 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3017 sections.
3018
3019 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3020
3021 @node Simple Commands
3022 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3023 @cindex linker script simple commands
3024 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3025
3026 @menu
3027 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3028 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3029 @ifclear SingleFormat
3030 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3031 @end ifclear
3032
3033 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3034 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3035 @end menu
3036
3037 @node Entry Point
3038 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3039 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3040 @cindex start of execution
3041 @cindex first instruction
3042 @cindex entry point
3043 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3044 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3045 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3046 @smallexample
3047 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3048 @end smallexample
3049
3050 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3051 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3052 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3053 @itemize @bullet
3054 @item
3055 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3056 @item
3057 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3058 @item
3059 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3060 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3061 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3062 @item
3063 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3064 @item
3065 The address @code{0}.
3066 @end itemize
3067
3068 @node File Commands
3069 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3070 @cindex linker script file commands
3071 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3072
3073 @table @code
3074 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3075 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3076 @cindex including a linker script
3077 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3078 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3079 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3080 10 levels deep.
3081
3082 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3083 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3084
3085 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3086 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3087 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3088 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3089 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3090 @cindex linker script input object files
3091 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3092 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3093
3094 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3095 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3096 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3097
3098 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3099 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3100
3101 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3102 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3103 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3104 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3105 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3106 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3107 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3108
3109 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3110 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3111 @samp{-l}.
3112
3113 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3114 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3115 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3116
3117 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3118 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3119 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3120 @cindex grouping input files
3121 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3122 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3123 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3124 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3125
3126 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3127 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3128 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3129 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3130 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3131 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3132 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3133 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3134 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3135 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3136 setting afterwards.
3137
3138 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3139 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3140 @cindex output file name in linker script
3141 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3142 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3143 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3144 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3145 precedence.
3146
3147 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3148 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3149
3150 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3151 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3152 @cindex library search path in linker script
3153 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3154 @cindex search path in linker script
3155 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3156 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3157 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3158 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3159 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3160 the command line option are searched first.
3161
3162 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3163 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3164 @cindex first input file
3165 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3166 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3167 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3168 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3169 first file.
3170 @end table
3171
3172 @ifclear SingleFormat
3173 @node Format Commands
3174 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3175 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3176
3177 @table @code
3178 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3179 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3180 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3181 @cindex output file format in linker script
3182 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3183 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3184 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3185 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3186 line option takes precedence.
3187
3188 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3189 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3190 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3191 desired endianness.
3192
3193 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3194 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3195 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3196 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3197
3198 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3199 command:
3200 @smallexample
3201 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3202 @end smallexample
3203 This says that the default format for the output file is
3204 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3205 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3206 format.
3207
3208 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3209 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3210 @cindex input file format in linker script
3211 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3212 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3213 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3214 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3215 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3216 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3217 @end table
3218 @end ifclear
3219
3220 @node REGION_ALIAS
3221 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3222 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3223 @cindex region alias
3224 @cindex region names
3225
3226 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3227 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3228
3229 @smallexample
3230 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3231 @end smallexample
3232
3233 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3234 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3235 to memory regions. An example follows.
3236
3237 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3238 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3239 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3240 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3241 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3242 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3243 sections:
3244
3245 @itemize @bullet
3246 @item
3247 @code{.text} program code;
3248 @item
3249 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3250 @item
3251 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3252 @item
3253 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3254 @end itemize
3255
3256 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3257 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3258 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3259 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3260 @code{C}:
3261 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3262 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3263 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3264 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3265 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3266 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3267 @end multitable
3268 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3269 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3270 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3271 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3272
3273 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3274 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3275 memory layout:
3276 @smallexample
3277 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3278
3279 SECTIONS
3280 @{
3281 .text :
3282 @{
3283 *(.text)
3284 @} > REGION_TEXT
3285 .rodata :
3286 @{
3287 *(.rodata)
3288 rodata_end = .;
3289 @} > REGION_RODATA
3290 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3291 @{
3292 data_start = .;
3293 *(.data)
3294 @} > REGION_DATA
3295 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3296 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3297 .bss :
3298 @{
3299 *(.bss)
3300 @} > REGION_BSS
3301 @}
3302 @end smallexample
3303
3304 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3305 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3306 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3307 @table @code
3308 @item A
3309 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3310 @smallexample
3311 MEMORY
3312 @{
3313 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3314 @}
3315
3316 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3317 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3318 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3319 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3320 @end smallexample
3321 @item B
3322 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3323 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3324 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3325 @smallexample
3326 MEMORY
3327 @{
3328 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3329 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3330 @}
3331
3332 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3333 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3334 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3335 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3336 @end smallexample
3337 @item C
3338 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3339 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3340 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3341 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3342 @smallexample
3343 MEMORY
3344 @{
3345 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3346 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3347 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3348 @}
3349
3350 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3351 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3352 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3353 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3354 @end smallexample
3355 @end table
3356
3357 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3358 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3359 necessary:
3360 @smallexample
3361 #include <string.h>
3362
3363 extern char data_start [];
3364 extern char data_size [];
3365 extern char data_load_start [];
3366
3367 void copy_data(void)
3368 @{
3369 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3370 @{
3371 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3372 @}
3373 @}
3374 @end smallexample
3375
3376 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3377 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3378 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3379
3380 @table @code
3381 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3382 @kindex ASSERT
3383 @cindex assertion in linker script
3384 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3385 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3386
3387 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3388 @kindex EXTERN
3389 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3390 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3391 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3392 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3393 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3394 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3395
3396 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3397 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3398 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3399 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3400 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3401 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3402
3403 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3404 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3405 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3406 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3407 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3408 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3409
3410 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3411 @kindex INSERT
3412 @cindex insert user script into default script
3413 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3414 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3415 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3416 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3417 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3418 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3419 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3420 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3421 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3422 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3423 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3424 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3425 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3426
3427 @smallexample
3428 SECTIONS
3429 @{
3430 OVERLAY :
3431 @{
3432 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3433 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3434 @}
3435 @}
3436 INSERT AFTER .text;
3437 @end smallexample
3438
3439 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3440 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3441 @cindex cross references
3442 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3443 references among certain output sections.
3444
3445 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3446 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3447 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3448 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3449 a function defined in the other section.
3450
3451 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3452 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3453 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3454 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3455 names.
3456
3457 @ifclear SingleFormat
3458 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3459 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3460 @cindex machine architecture
3461 @cindex architecture
3462 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3463 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3464 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3465 the @samp{-f} option.
3466 @end ifclear
3467
3468 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3469 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3470 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3471 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3472 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3473 @xref{Expression Section}.
3474 @end table
3475
3476 @node Assignments
3477 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3478 @cindex assignment in scripts
3479 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3480 @cindex variables, defining
3481 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3482 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3483
3484 @menu
3485 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3486 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3487 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3488 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3489 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3490 @end menu
3491
3492 @node Simple Assignments
3493 @subsection Simple Assignments
3494
3495 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3496
3497 @table @code
3498 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3499 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3500 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3501 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3502 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3503 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3504 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3505 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3506 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3507 @end table
3508
3509 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3510 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3511 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3512
3513 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3514 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3515
3516 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3517
3518 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3519
3520 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3521 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3522 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3523
3524 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3525 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3526
3527 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3528 assignments may be used:
3529
3530 @smallexample
3531 floating_point = 0;
3532 SECTIONS
3533 @{
3534 .text :
3535 @{
3536 *(.text)
3537 _etext = .;
3538 @}
3539 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3540 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3541 @}
3542 @end smallexample
3543 @noindent
3544 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3545 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3546 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3547 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3548 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3549
3550 @node HIDDEN
3551 @subsection HIDDEN
3552 @cindex HIDDEN
3553 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3554 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3555
3556 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3557 @code{HIDDEN}:
3558
3559 @smallexample
3560 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3561 SECTIONS
3562 @{
3563 .text :
3564 @{
3565 *(.text)
3566 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3567 @}
3568 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3569 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3570 @}
3571 @end smallexample
3572 @noindent
3573 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3574
3575 @node PROVIDE
3576 @subsection PROVIDE
3577 @cindex PROVIDE
3578 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3579 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3580 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3581 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3582 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3583 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3584 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3585 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3586
3587 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3588 @smallexample
3589 SECTIONS
3590 @{
3591 .text :
3592 @{
3593 *(.text)
3594 _etext = .;
3595 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3596 @}
3597 @}
3598 @end smallexample
3599
3600 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3601 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3602 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3603 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3604 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3605 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3606
3607 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3608 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3609 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3610 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3611 hidden and won't be exported.
3612
3613 @node Source Code Reference
3614 @subsection Source Code Reference
3615
3616 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3617 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3618 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3619 symbol that does not have a value.
3620
3621 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3622 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3623 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3624 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3625 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3626 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3627 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3628 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3629
3630 @smallexample
3631 extern int foo;
3632 @end smallexample
3633
3634 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3635
3636 @smallexample
3637 _foo = 1000;
3638 @end smallexample
3639
3640 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3641 transformation has taken place.
3642
3643 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3644 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3645 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3646 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3647 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3648 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3649 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 int foo = 1000;
3653 @end smallexample
3654
3655 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3656 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3657 number 1000 is initially stored.
3658
3659 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3660 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3661 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3662 So:
3663
3664 @smallexample
3665 foo = 1;
3666 @end smallexample
3667
3668 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3669 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3670 address. Whereas:
3671
3672 @smallexample
3673 int * a = & foo;
3674 @end smallexample
3675
3676 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3677 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3678 the variable @samp{a}.
3679
3680 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3681 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3682 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3683
3684 @smallexample
3685 foo = 1000;
3686 @end smallexample
3687
3688 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3689 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3690 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3691 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3692 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3693
3694 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3695 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3696 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3697 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3698 linker script contains these declarations:
3699
3700 @smallexample
3701 @group
3702 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3703 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3704 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3705 @end group
3706 @end smallexample
3707
3708 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3709
3710 @smallexample
3711 @group
3712 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3713
3714 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3715 @end group
3716 @end smallexample
3717
3718 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3719
3720 @node SECTIONS
3721 @section SECTIONS Command
3722 @kindex SECTIONS
3723 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3724 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3725
3726 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3727 @smallexample
3728 SECTIONS
3729 @{
3730 @var{sections-command}
3731 @var{sections-command}
3732 @dots{}
3733 @}
3734 @end smallexample
3735
3736 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3737
3738 @itemize @bullet
3739 @item
3740 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3741 @item
3742 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3743 @item
3744 an output section description
3745 @item
3746 an overlay description
3747 @end itemize
3748
3749 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3750 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3751 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3752 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3753 the layout of the output file.
3754
3755 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3756 below.
3757
3758 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3759 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3760 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3761 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3762 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3763 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3764
3765 @menu
3766 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3767 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3768 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3769 * Input Section:: Input section description
3770 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3771 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3772 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3773 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3774 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3775 @end menu
3776
3777 @node Output Section Description
3778 @subsection Output Section Description
3779 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3780 @smallexample
3781 @group
3782 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3783 [AT(@var{lma})]
3784 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3785 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3786 [@var{constraint}]
3787 @{
3788 @var{output-section-command}
3789 @var{output-section-command}
3790 @dots{}
3791 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3792 @end group
3793 @end smallexample
3794
3795 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3796
3797 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3798 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3799 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3800 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3801 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3802
3803 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3804
3805 @itemize @bullet
3806 @item
3807 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3808 @item
3809 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3810 @item
3811 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3812 @item
3813 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3814 @end itemize
3815
3816 @node Output Section Name
3817 @subsection Output Section Name
3818 @cindex name, section
3819 @cindex section name
3820 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3821 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3822 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3823 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3824 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3825 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3826 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3827 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3828 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3829 commas must be quoted.
3830
3831 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3832 Discarding}.
3833
3834 @node Output Section Address
3835 @subsection Output Section Address
3836 @cindex address, section
3837 @cindex section address
3838 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3839 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3840 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3841
3842 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3843 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3844 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3845 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3846 contained within the output section.
3847
3848 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3849
3850 @itemize @bullet
3851 @item
3852 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3853 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3854 in that region.
3855
3856 @item
3857 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3858 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3859 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3860 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3861
3862 @item
3863 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3864 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3865 counter.
3866 @end itemize
3867
3868 @noindent
3869 For example:
3870
3871 @smallexample
3872 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3873 @end smallexample
3874
3875 @noindent
3876 and
3877
3878 @smallexample
3879 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3880 @end smallexample
3881
3882 @noindent
3883 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3884 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3885 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3886 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3887 input sections.
3888
3889 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3890 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3891 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3892 do something like this:
3893 @smallexample
3894 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3895 @end smallexample
3896 @noindent
3897 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3898 aligned upward to the specified value.
3899
3900 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3901 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3902 sections are ignored).
3903
3904 @node Input Section
3905 @subsection Input Section Description
3906 @cindex input sections
3907 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3908 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3909
3910 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3911 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3912 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3913 map the input files into your memory layout.
3914
3915 @menu
3916 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3917 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3918 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3919 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3920 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3921 @end menu
3922
3923 @node Input Section Basics
3924 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3925 @cindex input section basics
3926 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3927 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3928
3929 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3930 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3931
3932 The most common input section description is to include all input
3933 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3934 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3935 @smallexample
3936 *(.text)
3937 @end smallexample
3938 @noindent
3939 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3940 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3941 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3942 example:
3943 @smallexample
3944 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3945 @end smallexample
3946 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3947 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3948
3949 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3950 @smallexample
3951 *(.text .rdata)
3952 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3953 @end smallexample
3954 @noindent
3955 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3956 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3957 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3958 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3959 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3960 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3961
3962 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3963 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3964 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3965 @smallexample
3966 data.o(.data)
3967 @end smallexample
3968
3969 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3970 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3971
3972 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3973
3974 @smallexample
3975 @group
3976 SECTIONS @{
3977 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3978 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3979 @}
3980 @end group
3981 @end smallexample
3982
3983 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3984 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3985 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3986 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3987 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3988
3989 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3990 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3991 with no whitespace around the colon.
3992
3993 @table @samp
3994 @item archive:file
3995 matches file within archive
3996 @item archive:
3997 matches the whole archive
3998 @item :file
3999 matches file but not one in an archive
4000 @end table
4001
4002 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4003 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4004 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4005 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4006 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4007 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4008 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4009 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4010 command.
4011
4012 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4013 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4014 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4015 @smallexample
4016 data.o
4017 @end smallexample
4018
4019 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4020 and does not contain any wild card
4021 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4022 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4023 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4024 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4025 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4026 the archive search path.
4027
4028 @node Input Section Wildcards
4029 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4030 @cindex input section wildcards
4031 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4032 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4033 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4034 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4035 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4036
4037 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4038 pattern for the file name.
4039
4040 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4041
4042 @table @samp
4043 @item *
4044 matches any number of characters
4045 @item ?
4046 matches any single character
4047 @item [@var{chars}]
4048 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4049 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4050 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4051 @item \
4052 quotes the following character
4053 @end table
4054
4055 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4056 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4057 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4058 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4059 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4060 a @samp{/} character.
4061
4062 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4063 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4064 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4065
4066 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4067 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4068 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4069 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4070 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4071 @smallexample
4072 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4073 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4074 @end smallexample
4075
4076 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4077 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4078 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4079 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4080 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4081 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4082 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4083
4084 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4085 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4086 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4087 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4088 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4089 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4090
4091 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4092 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4093 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4094 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4095 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4096
4097 @cindex SORT
4098 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4099
4100 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4101 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4102
4103 @enumerate
4104 @item
4105 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4106 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4107 sections have the same name.
4108 @item
4109 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4110 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4111 sections have the same alignment.
4112 @item
4113 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4114 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4115 @item
4116 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4117 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4118 @item
4119 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4120 @end enumerate
4121
4122 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4123 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4124 takes precedence over the command line option.
4125
4126 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4127 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4128 treated as nested sorting command.
4129
4130 @enumerate
4131 @item
4132 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4133 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4134 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4135 @item
4136 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4137 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4138 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4139 @end enumerate
4140
4141 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4142 command line option will be ignored.
4143
4144 @cindex SORT_NONE
4145 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4146 section sorting option.
4147
4148 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4149 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4150 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4151
4152 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4153 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4154 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4155 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4156 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4157 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4158 @smallexample
4159 @group
4160 SECTIONS @{
4161 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4162 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4163 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4164 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4165 @}
4166 @end group
4167 @end smallexample
4168
4169 @node Input Section Common
4170 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4171 @cindex common symbol placement
4172 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4173 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4174 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4175 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4176 named @samp{COMMON}.
4177
4178 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4179 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4180 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4181 input files are placed in another section.
4182
4183 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4184 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4185 @smallexample
4186 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4187 @end smallexample
4188
4189 @cindex scommon section
4190 @cindex small common symbols
4191 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4192 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4193 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4194 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4195 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4196 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4197 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4198 locations.
4199
4200 @cindex [COMMON]
4201 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4202 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4203 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4204
4205 @node Input Section Keep
4206 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4207 @cindex KEEP
4208 @cindex garbage collection
4209 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4210 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4211 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4212 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4213 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4214
4215 @node Input Section Example
4216 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4217 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4218 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4219 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4220 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4221 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4222 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4223 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4224 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4225 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4226
4227 @smallexample
4228 @group
4229 SECTIONS @{
4230 outputa 0x10000 :
4231 @{
4232 all.o
4233 foo.o (.input1)
4234 @}
4235 @end group
4236 @group
4237 outputb :
4238 @{
4239 foo.o (.input2)
4240 foo1.o (.input1)
4241 @}
4242 @end group
4243 @group
4244 outputc :
4245 @{
4246 *(.input1)
4247 *(.input2)
4248 @}
4249 @}
4250 @end group
4251 @end smallexample
4252
4253 @node Output Section Data
4254 @subsection Output Section Data
4255 @cindex data
4256 @cindex section data
4257 @cindex output section data
4258 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4259 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4260 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4261 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4262 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4263 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4264 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4265 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4266 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4267 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4268 counter.
4269
4270 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4271 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4272 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4273 stored.
4274
4275 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4276 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4277 @smallexample
4278 BYTE(1)
4279 LONG(addr)
4280 @end smallexample
4281
4282 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4283 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4284 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4285 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4286 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4287
4288 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4289 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4290 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4291 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4292 endianness of the first input object file.
4293
4294 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4295 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4296 @smallexample
4297 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4298 @end smallexample
4299 whereas this will work:
4300 @smallexample
4301 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4302 @end smallexample
4303
4304 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4305 @cindex holes, filling
4306 @cindex unspecified memory
4307 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4308 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4309 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4310 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4311 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4312 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4313 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4314 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4315 different parts of an output section.
4316
4317 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4318 value @samp{0x90}:
4319 @smallexample
4320 FILL(0x90909090)
4321 @end smallexample
4322
4323 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4324 section attribute, but it only affects the
4325 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4326 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4327 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4328 expression.
4329
4330 @node Output Section Keywords
4331 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4332 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4333 commands.
4334
4335 @table @code
4336 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4337 @cindex input filename symbols
4338 @cindex filename symbols
4339 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4340 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4341 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4342 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4343 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4344
4345 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4346 normally used for any other object file format.
4347
4348 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4349 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4350 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4351 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4352 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4353 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4354 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4355 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4356 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4357 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4358 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4359 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4360 ignored for other object file formats.
4361
4362 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4363 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4364 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4365 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4366 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4367 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4368 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4369 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4370 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4371 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4372 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4373 @code{exit}.
4374
4375 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4376 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4377 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4378 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4379 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4380 runtime code expects to see.
4381
4382 @smallexample
4383 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4384 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4385 *(.ctors)
4386 LONG(0)
4387 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4388 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4389 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4390 *(.dtors)
4391 LONG(0)
4392 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4393 @end smallexample
4394
4395 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4396 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4397 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4398 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4399 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4400 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4401 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4402 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4403
4404 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4405 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4406 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4407 scripts.
4408
4409 @end table
4410
4411 @node Output Section Discarding
4412 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4413 @cindex discarding sections
4414 @cindex sections, discarding
4415 @cindex removing sections
4416 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4417 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4418 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4419 @smallexample
4420 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4421 @end smallexample
4422 @noindent
4423 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4424 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4425 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4426 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4427 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4428 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4429 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4430 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4431 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4432
4433 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4434 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4435 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4436 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4437 section is discarded.
4438
4439 @cindex /DISCARD/
4440 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4441 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4442 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4443
4444 @node Output Section Attributes
4445 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4446 @cindex output section attributes
4447 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4448 like this:
4449
4450 @smallexample
4451 @group
4452 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4453 [AT(@var{lma})]
4454 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4455 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4456 [@var{constraint}]
4457 @{
4458 @var{output-section-command}
4459 @var{output-section-command}
4460 @dots{}
4461 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4462 @end group
4463 @end smallexample
4464
4465 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4466 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4467 remaining section attributes.
4468
4469 @menu
4470 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4471 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4472 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4473 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4474 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4475 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4476 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4477 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4478 @end menu
4479
4480 @node Output Section Type
4481 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4482 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4483 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4484
4485 @table @code
4486 @item NOLOAD
4487 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4488 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4489 @item DSECT
4490 @itemx COPY
4491 @itemx INFO
4492 @itemx OVERLAY
4493 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4494 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4495 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4496 section when the program is run.
4497 @end table
4498
4499 @kindex NOLOAD
4500 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4501 @cindex loading, preventing
4502 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4503 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4504 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4505 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4506 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4507 @smallexample
4508 @group
4509 SECTIONS @{
4510 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4511 @dots{}
4512 @}
4513 @end group
4514 @end smallexample
4515
4516 @node Output Section LMA
4517 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4518 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4519 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4520 @cindex load address
4521 @cindex section load address
4522 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4523 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4524 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4525 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4526 address is optional.
4527
4528 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4529 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4530 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4531 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4532 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4533
4534 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4535 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4536 load address:
4537
4538 @itemize @bullet
4539 @item
4540 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4541 the LMA address as well.
4542
4543 @item
4544 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4545
4546 @item
4547 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4548 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4549 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4550 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4551 the last section in the located region.
4552
4553 @item
4554 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4555 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4556
4557 @item
4558 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4559 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4560 @end itemize
4561
4562 @cindex ROM initialized data
4563 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4564 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4565 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4566 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4567 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4568 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4569 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4570 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4571 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4572
4573 @smallexample
4574 @group
4575 SECTIONS
4576 @{
4577 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4578 .mdata 0x2000 :
4579 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4580 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4581 .bss 0x3000 :
4582 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4583 @}
4584 @end group
4585 @end smallexample
4586
4587 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4588 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4589 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4590 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4591 script.
4592
4593 @smallexample
4594 @group
4595 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4596 char *src = &_etext;
4597 char *dst = &_data;
4598
4599 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4600 while (dst < &_edata)
4601 *dst++ = *src++;
4602
4603 /* Zero bss. */
4604 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4605 *dst = 0;
4606 @end group
4607 @end smallexample
4608
4609 @node Forced Output Alignment
4610 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4611 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4612 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4613 @cindex output section alignment
4614 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4615 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4616 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4617
4618 @node Forced Input Alignment
4619 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4620 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4621 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4622 @cindex input section alignment
4623 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4624 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4625 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4626
4627 @node Output Section Constraint
4628 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4629 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4630 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4631 @cindex constraints on output sections
4632 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4633 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4634 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4635 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4636
4637 @node Output Section Region
4638 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4639 @kindex >@var{region}
4640 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4641 @cindex memory regions and sections
4642 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4643 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4644
4645 Here is a simple example:
4646 @smallexample
4647 @group
4648 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4649 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4650 @end group
4651 @end smallexample
4652
4653 @node Output Section Phdr
4654 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4655 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4656 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4657 @cindex program headers and sections
4658 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4659 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4660 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4661 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4662 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4663 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4664
4665 Here is a simple example:
4666 @smallexample
4667 @group
4668 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4669 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4670 @end group
4671 @end smallexample
4672
4673 @node Output Section Fill
4674 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4675 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4676 @cindex section fill pattern
4677 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4678 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4679 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4680 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4681 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4682 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4683 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4684 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4685 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4686 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4687 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4688 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4689 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4690
4691 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4692 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4693
4694 Here is a simple example:
4695 @smallexample
4696 @group
4697 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4698 @end group
4699 @end smallexample
4700
4701 @node Overlay Description
4702 @subsection Overlay Description
4703 @kindex OVERLAY
4704 @cindex overlays
4705 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4706 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4707 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4708 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4709 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4710 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4711 than another.
4712
4713 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4714 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4715 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4716 command is as follows:
4717 @smallexample
4718 @group
4719 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4720 @{
4721 @var{secname1}
4722 @{
4723 @var{output-section-command}
4724 @var{output-section-command}
4725 @dots{}
4726 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4727 @var{secname2}
4728 @{
4729 @var{output-section-command}
4730 @var{output-section-command}
4731 @dots{}
4732 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4733 @dots{}
4734 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4735 @end group
4736 @end smallexample
4737
4738 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4739 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4740 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4741 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4742 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4743 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4744
4745 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4746 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4747
4748 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4749 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4750 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4751 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4752 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4753 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4754
4755 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4756 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4757 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4758 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4759 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4760
4761 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4762 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4763 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4764 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4765 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4766 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4767 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4768
4769 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4770 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4771
4772 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4773 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4774 @smallexample
4775 @group
4776 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4777 @{
4778 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4779 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4780 @}
4781 @end group
4782 @end smallexample
4783 @noindent
4784 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4785 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4786 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4787 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4788 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4789 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4790
4791 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4792 like the following.
4793
4794 @smallexample
4795 @group
4796 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4797 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4798 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4799 @end group
4800 @end smallexample
4801
4802 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4803 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4804 example could have been written identically as follows.
4805
4806 @smallexample
4807 @group
4808 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4809 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4810 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4811 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4812 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4813 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4814 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4815 @end group
4816 @end smallexample
4817
4818 @node MEMORY
4819 @section MEMORY Command
4820 @kindex MEMORY
4821 @cindex memory regions
4822 @cindex regions of memory
4823 @cindex allocating memory
4824 @cindex discontinuous memory
4825 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4826 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4827
4828 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4829 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4830 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4831 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4832 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4833 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4834 around to fit into the available regions.
4835
4836 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4837 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4838 you wish. The syntax is:
4839 @smallexample
4840 @group
4841 MEMORY
4842 @{
4843 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4844 @dots{}
4845 @}
4846 @end group
4847 @end smallexample
4848
4849 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4850 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4851 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4852 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4853 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4854 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4855 command.
4856
4857 @cindex memory region attributes
4858 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4859 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4860 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4861 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4862 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4863 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4864 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4865
4866 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4867 @table @samp
4868 @item R
4869 Read-only section
4870 @item W
4871 Read/write section
4872 @item X
4873 Executable section
4874 @item A
4875 Allocatable section
4876 @item I
4877 Initialized section
4878 @item L
4879 Same as @samp{I}
4880 @item !
4881 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4882 @end table
4883
4884 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4885 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4886 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4887 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4888 attributes.
4889
4890 @kindex ORIGIN =
4891 @kindex o =
4892 @kindex org =
4893 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4894 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4895 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4896 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4897 @code{ORG}).
4898
4899 @kindex LENGTH =
4900 @kindex len =
4901 @kindex l =
4902 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4903 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4904 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4905 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4906
4907 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4908 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4909 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4910 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4911 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4912 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4913 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4914 region.
4915
4916 @smallexample
4917 @group
4918 MEMORY
4919 @{
4920 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4921 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4922 @}
4923 @end group
4924 @end smallexample
4925
4926 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4927 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4928 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4929 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4930 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4931 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4932 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4933 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4934 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4935
4936 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4937 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4938 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4939
4940 @smallexample
4941 @group
4942 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4943 @end group
4944 @end smallexample
4945
4946 @node PHDRS
4947 @section PHDRS Command
4948 @kindex PHDRS
4949 @cindex program headers
4950 @cindex ELF program headers
4951 @cindex program segments
4952 @cindex segments, ELF
4953 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4954 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4955 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4956 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4957
4958 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4959 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4960 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4961 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4962 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4963
4964 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4965 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4966 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4967 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4968 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4969
4970 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4971 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4972 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4973
4974 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4975 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4976
4977 @smallexample
4978 @group
4979 PHDRS
4980 @{
4981 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4982 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4983 @}
4984 @end group
4985 @end smallexample
4986
4987 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4988 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4989 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4990 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4991 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4992 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4993
4994 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4995 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4996 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4997 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4998 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4999 Section Phdr}.
5000
5001 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5002 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5003 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5004 contain the section.
5005
5006 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5007 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5008 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5009 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5010 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5011 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5012 segment at all.
5013
5014 @kindex FILEHDR
5015 @kindex PHDRS
5016 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5017 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5018 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5019 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5020 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5021 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5022 these keywords.
5023
5024 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5025 value of the keyword.
5026
5027 @table @asis
5028 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5029 Indicates an unused program header.
5030
5031 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5032 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5033 the file.
5034
5035 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5036 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5037
5038 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5039 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5040 found.
5041
5042 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5043 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5044
5045 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5046 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5047 ABI.
5048
5049 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5050 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5051
5052 @item @var{expression}
5053 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5054 be used for types not defined above.
5055 @end table
5056
5057 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5058 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5059 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5060 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5061 output section attribute.
5062
5063 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5064 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5065 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5066 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5067 header.
5068
5069 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5070 headers used on a native ELF system.
5071
5072 @example
5073 @group
5074 PHDRS
5075 @{
5076 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5077 interp PT_INTERP ;
5078 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5079 data PT_LOAD ;
5080 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5081 @}
5082
5083 SECTIONS
5084 @{
5085 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5086 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5087 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5088 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5089 @dots{}
5090 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5091 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5092 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5093 @dots{}
5094 @}
5095 @end group
5096 @end example
5097
5098 @node VERSION
5099 @section VERSION Command
5100 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5101 @cindex symbol versions
5102 @cindex version script
5103 @cindex versions of symbols
5104 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5105 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5106 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5107 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5108 shared library.
5109
5110 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5111 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5112 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5113
5114 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5115 @smallexample
5116 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5117 @end smallexample
5118
5119 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5120 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5121 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5122 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5123 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5124 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5125 library.
5126
5127 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5128 examples.
5129
5130 @smallexample
5131 VERS_1.1 @{
5132 global:
5133 foo1;
5134 local:
5135 old*;
5136 original*;
5137 new*;
5138 @};
5139
5140 VERS_1.2 @{
5141 foo2;
5142 @} VERS_1.1;
5143
5144 VERS_2.0 @{
5145 bar1; bar2;
5146 extern "C++" @{
5147 ns::*;
5148 "f(int, double)";
5149 @};
5150 @} VERS_1.2;
5151 @end smallexample
5152
5153 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5154 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5155 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5156 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5157 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5158 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5159 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5160 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5161 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5162 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5163
5164 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5165 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5166 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5167
5168 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5169 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5170 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5171
5172 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5173 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5174 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5175 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5176 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5177 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5178 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5179 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5180 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5181
5182 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5183 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5184 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5185 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5186
5187 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5188 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5189 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5190 won't.
5191
5192 @smallexample
5193 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5194 @end smallexample
5195
5196 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5197 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5198 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5199 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5200 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5201 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5202 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5203 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5204 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5205 search for each symbol reference.
5206
5207 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5208 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5209 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5210 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5211 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5212 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5213 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5214 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5215 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5216
5217 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5218 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5219 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5220 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5221 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5222 @smallexample
5223 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5224 @end smallexample
5225 @noindent
5226 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5227 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5228 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5229 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5230 takes precedence over a version script.
5231
5232 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5233 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5234 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5235 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5236 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5237
5238 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5239 source file. Here is an example:
5240
5241 @smallexample
5242 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5243 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5244 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5245 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5246 @end smallexample
5247
5248 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5249 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5250 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5251 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5252
5253 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5254 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5255 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5256 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5257 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5258 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5259
5260 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5261 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5262 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5263 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5264
5265 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5266
5267 @smallexample
5268 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5269 @end smallexample
5270
5271 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5272 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5273 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5274 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5275 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5276
5277 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5278 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5279 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5280 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5281 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5282 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5283 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5284 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5285 expect when you upgrade.
5286
5287 @node Expressions
5288 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5289 @cindex expressions
5290 @cindex arithmetic
5291 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5292 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5293 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5294 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5295
5296 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5297
5298 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5299 expressions.
5300
5301 @menu
5302 * Constants:: Constants
5303 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5304 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5305 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5306 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5307 * Operators:: Operators
5308 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5309 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5310 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5311 @end menu
5312
5313 @node Constants
5314 @subsection Constants
5315 @cindex integer notation
5316 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5317 All constants are integers.
5318
5319 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5320 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5321 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5322 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5323 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5324 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5325
5326 @cindex scaled integers
5327 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5328 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5329 @cindex suffixes for integers
5330 @cindex integer suffixes
5331 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5332 constant by
5333 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5334 @ifnottex
5335 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5336 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5337 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5338 @end ifnottex
5339 @tex
5340 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5341 @end tex
5342 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5343 respectively. For example, the following
5344 all refer to the same quantity:
5345
5346 @smallexample
5347 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5348 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5349 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5350 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5351 @end smallexample
5352
5353 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5354 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5355
5356 @node Symbolic Constants
5357 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5358 @cindex symbolic constants
5359 @kindex CONSTANT
5360 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5361 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5362
5363 @table @code
5364 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5365 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5366 The target's maximum page size.
5367
5368 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5369 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5370 The target's default page size.
5371 @end table
5372
5373 So for example:
5374
5375 @smallexample
5376 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5377 @end smallexample
5378
5379 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5380 supported by the target.
5381
5382 @node Symbols
5383 @subsection Symbol Names
5384 @cindex symbol names
5385 @cindex names
5386 @cindex quoted symbol names
5387 @kindex "
5388 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5389 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5390 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5391 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5392 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5393 @smallexample
5394 "SECTION" = 9;
5395 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5396 @end smallexample
5397
5398 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5399 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5400 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5401
5402 @node Orphan Sections
5403 @subsection Orphan Sections
5404 @cindex orphan
5405 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5406 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5407 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5408 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5409 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5410 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5411 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5412 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5413 at the end of the file.
5414
5415 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5416 well as section flag.
5417
5418 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5419 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5420 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5421 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5422 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5423 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5424 character.
5425
5426 @node Location Counter
5427 @subsection The Location Counter
5428 @kindex .
5429 @cindex dot
5430 @cindex location counter
5431 @cindex current output location
5432 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5433 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5434 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5435 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5436 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5437
5438 @cindex holes
5439 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5440 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5441 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5442 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5443 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5444
5445 @smallexample
5446 SECTIONS
5447 @{
5448 output :
5449 @{
5450 file1(.text)
5451 . = . + 1000;
5452 file2(.text)
5453 . += 1000;
5454 file3(.text)
5455 @} = 0x12345678;
5456 @}
5457 @end smallexample
5458 @noindent
5459 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5460 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5461 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5462 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5463 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5464 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5465
5466 @cindex dot inside sections
5467 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5468 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5469 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5470 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5471 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5472 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5473
5474 @smallexample
5475 SECTIONS
5476 @{
5477 . = 0x100
5478 .text: @{
5479 *(.text)
5480 . = 0x200
5481 @}
5482 . = 0x500
5483 .data: @{
5484 *(.data)
5485 . += 0x600
5486 @}
5487 @}
5488 @end smallexample
5489
5490 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5491 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5492 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5493 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5494 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5495 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5496 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5497 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5498
5499 @cindex dot outside sections
5500 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5501 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5502 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5503
5504 @smallexample
5505 SECTIONS
5506 @{
5507 start_of_text = . ;
5508 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5509 end_of_text = . ;
5510
5511 start_of_data = . ;
5512 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5513 end_of_data = . ;
5514 @}
5515 @end smallexample
5516
5517 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5518 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5519 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5520 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5521 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5522 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5523 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5524 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5525 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5526 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5527 as follows:
5528
5529 @smallexample
5530 SECTIONS
5531 @{
5532 start_of_text = . ;
5533 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5534 end_of_text = . ;
5535
5536 start_of_data = . ;
5537 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5538 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5539 end_of_data = . ;
5540 @}
5541 @end smallexample
5542
5543 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5544 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5545 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5546 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5547 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5548 section. So you could write:
5549
5550 @smallexample
5551 SECTIONS
5552 @{
5553 start_of_text = . ;
5554 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5555 end_of_text = . ;
5556
5557 . = . ;
5558 start_of_data = . ;
5559 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5560 end_of_data = . ;
5561 @}
5562 @end smallexample
5563
5564 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5565 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5566
5567 @need 2000
5568 @node Operators
5569 @subsection Operators
5570 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5571 @cindex arithmetic operators
5572 @cindex precedence in expressions
5573 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5574 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5575 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5576 @ifnottex
5577 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5578 @smallexample
5579 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5580 (highest)
5581 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5582 2 left * / %
5583 3 left + -
5584 4 left >> <<
5585 5 left == != > < <= >=
5586 6 left &
5587 7 left |
5588 8 left &&
5589 9 left ||
5590 10 right ? :
5591 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5592 (lowest)
5593 @end smallexample
5594 Notes:
5595 (1) Prefix operators
5596 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5597 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5598 @end ifnottex
5599 @tex
5600 \vskip \baselineskip
5601 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5602 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5603 \hrule
5604 \halign
5605 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5606 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5607 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5608 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5609 \noalign{\hrule}
5610 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5611 &highest&&&&&\cr
5612 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5613 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5614 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5615 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5616 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5617 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5618 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5619 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5620 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5621 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5622 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5623 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5624 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5625 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5626 \hrule}
5627 @end tex
5628 @iftex
5629 {
5630 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5631 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5632 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5633 }
5634 @end iftex
5635 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5636
5637 @node Evaluation
5638 @subsection Evaluation
5639 @cindex lazy evaluation
5640 @cindex expression evaluation order
5641 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5642 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5643
5644 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5645 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5646 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5647 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5648
5649 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5650 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5651 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5652 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5653
5654 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5655 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5656 allocation.
5657
5658 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5659 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5660
5661 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5662 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5663 following
5664 @smallexample
5665 @group
5666 SECTIONS
5667 @{
5668 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5669 @{ *(.text) @}
5670 @}
5671 @end group
5672 @end smallexample
5673 @noindent
5674 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5675 address}.
5676
5677 @node Expression Section
5678 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5679 @cindex expression sections
5680 @cindex absolute expressions
5681 @cindex relative expressions
5682 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5683 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5684 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5685 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5686 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5687 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5688 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5689 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5690 operations.
5691
5692 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5693 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5694 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5695 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5696 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5697 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5698 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5699 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5700 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5701 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5702 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5703 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5704 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5705 everywhere.
5706
5707 In the following simple example,
5708
5709 @smallexample
5710 @group
5711 SECTIONS
5712 @{
5713 . = 0x100;
5714 __executable_start = 0x100;
5715 .data :
5716 @{
5717 . = 0x10;
5718 __data_start = 0x10;
5719 *(.data)
5720 @}
5721 @dots{}
5722 @}
5723 @end group
5724 @end smallexample
5725
5726 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5727 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5728 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5729 section in the second two assignments.
5730
5731 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5732 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5733
5734 @itemize @bullet
5735 @item
5736 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5737 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5738 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5739 @item
5740 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5741 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5742 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5743 @item
5744 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5745 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5746 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5747 before applying the operator.
5748 @end itemize
5749
5750 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5751
5752 @itemize @bullet
5753 @item
5754 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5755 @item
5756 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5757 @item
5758 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5759 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5760 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5761 @item
5762 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5763 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5764 section as the relative operand(s).
5765 @item
5766 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5767 conversions) is an absolute address.
5768 @end itemize
5769
5770 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5771 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5772 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5773 section @samp{.data}:
5774 @smallexample
5775 SECTIONS
5776 @{
5777 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5778 @}
5779 @end smallexample
5780 @noindent
5781 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5782 @samp{.data} section.
5783
5784 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5785 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5786
5787 @node Builtin Functions
5788 @subsection Builtin Functions
5789 @cindex functions in expressions
5790 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5791 use in linker script expressions.
5792
5793 @table @code
5794 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5795 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5796 @cindex expression, absolute
5797 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5798 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5799 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5800 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5801
5802 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5803 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5804 @cindex section address in expression
5805 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5806 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5807 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5808 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5809 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5810 the other two will be absolute:
5811 @smallexample
5812 @group
5813 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5814 .output1 :
5815 @{
5816 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5817 @dots{}
5818 @}
5819 .output :
5820 @{
5821 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5822 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5823 @}
5824 @dots{} @}
5825 @end group
5826 @end smallexample
5827
5828 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5829 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5830 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5831 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5832 @cindex round up location counter
5833 @cindex align location counter
5834 @cindex round up expression
5835 @cindex align expression
5836 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5837 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5838 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5839 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5840 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5841 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5842
5843 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5844 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5845 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5846 input sections:
5847 @smallexample
5848 @group
5849 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5850 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5851 *(.data)
5852 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5853 @}
5854 @dots{} @}
5855 @end group
5856 @end smallexample
5857 @noindent
5858 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5859 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5860 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5861 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5862
5863 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5864
5865 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5866 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5867 @cindex section alignment
5868 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5869 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5870 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5871 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5872 value in that section.
5873 @smallexample
5874 @group
5875 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5876 .output @{
5877 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5878 @dots{}
5879 @}
5880 @dots{} @}
5881 @end group
5882 @end smallexample
5883
5884 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5885 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5886 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5887 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5888 section.
5889
5890 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5891 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5892 This is equivalent to either
5893 @smallexample
5894 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5895 @end smallexample
5896 or
5897 @smallexample
5898 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5899 @end smallexample
5900 @noindent
5901 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5902 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5903 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5904 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5905 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5906 bytes in the on-disk file.
5907
5908 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5909 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5910 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5911 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5912 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5913
5914 @noindent
5915 Example:
5916 @smallexample
5917 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5918 @end smallexample
5919
5920 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5921 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5922 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5923 evaluation purposes.
5924
5925 @smallexample
5926 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5927 @end smallexample
5928
5929 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5930 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5931 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5932 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
5933 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5934 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5935 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5936 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5937 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5938 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5939 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5940 section alignment.
5941
5942 @smallexample
5943 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5944 @end smallexample
5945
5946 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5947 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5948 @cindex symbol defaults
5949 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5950 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5951 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5952 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5953 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5954 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5955 existed, its value is preserved:
5956
5957 @smallexample
5958 @group
5959 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5960 .text : @{
5961 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5962 @dots{}
5963 @}
5964 @dots{}
5965 @}
5966 @end group
5967 @end smallexample
5968
5969 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5970 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5971 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5972
5973 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5974 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5975 @cindex section load address in expression
5976 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5977 Section LMA}).
5978
5979 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5980 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5981 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5982 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5983
5984 @kindex MAX
5985 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5986 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5987
5988 @kindex MIN
5989 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5990 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5991
5992 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5993 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5994 @cindex unallocated address, next
5995 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5996 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5997 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5998 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5999
6000 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6001 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6002 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6003
6004 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6005 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6006 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6007 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6008 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6009 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6010 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6011 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6012 name.
6013
6014 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6015 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6016 @cindex section size
6017 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6018 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6019 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6020 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6021 @smallexample
6022 @group
6023 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6024 .output @{
6025 .start = . ;
6026 @dots{}
6027 .end = . ;
6028 @}
6029 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6030 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6031 @dots{} @}
6032 @end group
6033 @end smallexample
6034
6035 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6036 @itemx sizeof_headers
6037 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6038 @cindex header size
6039 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6040 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6041 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6042 choose, to facilitate paging.
6043
6044 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6045 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6046 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6047 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6048 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6049 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6050 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6051 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6052 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6053 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6054 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6055 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6056 @end table
6057
6058 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6059 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6060 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6061 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6062 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6063 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6064 linker will report an error.
6065
6066 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6067
6068 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6069 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6070 commands.
6071
6072 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6073 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6074 read. This can affect archive searching.
6075
6076 @ifset GENERIC
6077 @node Machine Dependent
6078 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6079
6080 @cindex machine dependencies
6081 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6082 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6083 functionality are not listed.
6084
6085 @menu
6086 @ifset H8300
6087 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6088 @end ifset
6089 @ifset I960
6090 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6091 @end ifset
6092 @ifset M68HC11
6093 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6094 @end ifset
6095 @ifset ARM
6096 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6097 @end ifset
6098 @ifset HPPA
6099 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6100 @end ifset
6101 @ifset M68K
6102 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6103 @end ifset
6104 @ifset MIPS
6105 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6106 @end ifset
6107 @ifset MMIX
6108 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6109 @end ifset
6110 @ifset MSP430
6111 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6112 @end ifset
6113 @ifset NDS32
6114 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6115 @end ifset
6116 @ifset NIOSII
6117 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6118 @end ifset
6119 @ifset POWERPC
6120 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6121 @end ifset
6122 @ifset POWERPC64
6123 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6124 @end ifset
6125 @ifset SPU
6126 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6127 @end ifset
6128 @ifset TICOFF
6129 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6130 @end ifset
6131 @ifset WIN32
6132 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6133 @end ifset
6134 @ifset XTENSA
6135 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6136 @end ifset
6137 @end menu
6138 @end ifset
6139
6140 @ifset H8300
6141 @ifclear GENERIC
6142 @raisesections
6143 @end ifclear
6144
6145 @node H8/300
6146 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6147
6148 @cindex H8/300 support
6149 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6150 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6151
6152 @table @emph
6153 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6154 @item relaxing address modes
6155 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6156 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6157 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6158 respectively.
6159
6160 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6161 @item synthesizing instructions
6162 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6163 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6164 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6165 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6166 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6167 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6168 top page of memory).
6169
6170 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6171 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6172 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6173 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6174 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6175 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6176 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6177
6178 @item bit manipulation instructions
6179 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6180 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6181 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6182 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6183 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6184 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6185 the top page of memory).
6186
6187 @item system control instructions
6188 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6189 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6190 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6191 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6192 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6193 the top page of memory).
6194 @end table
6195
6196 @ifclear GENERIC
6197 @lowersections
6198 @end ifclear
6199 @end ifset
6200
6201 @ifclear GENERIC
6202 @ifset Renesas
6203 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6204 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6205 @node Renesas
6206 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6207
6208 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6209 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6210 options are required for these chips.
6211 @end ifset
6212 @end ifclear
6213
6214 @ifset I960
6215 @ifclear GENERIC
6216 @raisesections
6217 @end ifclear
6218
6219 @node i960
6220 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6221
6222 @cindex i960 support
6223
6224 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6225 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6226 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6227 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6228 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6229 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6230 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6231
6232 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6233 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6234 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6235 the names
6236
6237 @smallexample
6238 @group
6239 try
6240 libtry.a
6241 tryca
6242 libtryca.a
6243 @end group
6244 @end smallexample
6245
6246 @noindent
6247 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6248 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6249
6250 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6251 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6252 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6253 specifies a library.
6254
6255 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6256 @cindex relaxing on i960
6257 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6258 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6259 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6260 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6261 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6262 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6263 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6264 not itself call any subroutines).
6265
6266 @ifclear GENERIC
6267 @lowersections
6268 @end ifclear
6269 @end ifset
6270
6271 @ifset ARM
6272 @ifclear GENERIC
6273 @raisesections
6274 @end ifclear
6275
6276 @ifset M68HC11
6277 @ifclear GENERIC
6278 @raisesections
6279 @end ifclear
6280
6281 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6282 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6283
6284 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6285
6286 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6287
6288 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6289 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6290
6291 @table @emph
6292 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6293 @item relaxing address modes
6294 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6295 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6296 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6297 respectively.
6298
6299 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6300 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6301 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6302
6303 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6304 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6305 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6306 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6307 @code{bset} instructions.
6308
6309 @end table
6310
6311 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6312
6313 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6314 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6315 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6316 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6317 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6318 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6319 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6320 point to the function trampoline.
6321
6322 @ifclear GENERIC
6323 @lowersections
6324 @end ifclear
6325 @end ifset
6326
6327 @node ARM
6328 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6329
6330 @cindex ARM interworking support
6331 @kindex --support-old-code
6332 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6333 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6334 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6335 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6336 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6337 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6338 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6339 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6340 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6341 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6342
6343 @cindex thumb entry point
6344 @cindex entry point, thumb
6345 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6346 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6347 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6348 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6349 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6350 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6351
6352 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6353 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6354 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6355 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6356 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6357 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6358
6359 @cindex BE8
6360 @kindex --be8
6361 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6362 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6363 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6364
6365 @cindex TARGET1
6366 @kindex --target1-rel
6367 @kindex --target1-abs
6368 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6369 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6370 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6371 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6372
6373 @cindex TARGET2
6374 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6375 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6376 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6377 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6378 @table @samp
6379 @item rel
6380 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6381 @item abs
6382 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6383 @item got-rel
6384 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6385 @end table
6386
6387 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6388 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6389 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6390 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6391 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6392 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6393
6394 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6395 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6396 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6397
6398 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6399 relocations are ignored.
6400
6401 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6402 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6403 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6404 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6405
6406 @smallexample
6407 TST rM, #1
6408 MOVEQ PC, rM
6409 BX Rn
6410 @end smallexample
6411
6412 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6413 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6414 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6415
6416 @cindex USE_BLX
6417 @kindex --use-blx
6418 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6419 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6420 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6421 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6422 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6423
6424 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6425 specify it if you are using that target.
6426
6427 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6428 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6429 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6430 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6431 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6432 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6433 the support code can read the intended values.
6434
6435 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6436 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6437 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6438 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6439 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6440 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6441
6442 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6443 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6444 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6445 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6446 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6447 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6448
6449 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6450 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6451 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6452 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6453 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6454 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6455 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6456
6457 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6458 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6459 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6460 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6461 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6462 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6463 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6464
6465 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6466 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6467 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6468
6469 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6470 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6471 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6472 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6473 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6474 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6475 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6476 not be diagnosed.
6477
6478 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6479 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6480 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6481 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6482 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6483 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6484 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6485
6486 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6487 @kindex --pic-veneer
6488 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6489 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6490 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6491 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6492
6493 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6494 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6495 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6496 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6497 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6498 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6499 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6500 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6501 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6502 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6503 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6504 where they should be placed.
6505
6506 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6507 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6508 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6509 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6510 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6511 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6512 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6513 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6514 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6515 from the input sections.
6516
6517 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6518 @samp{N = +1}.
6519
6520 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6521 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6522 otherwise.
6523
6524 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6525 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6526 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6527 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6528
6529 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6530
6531 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6532 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6533 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6534 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6535
6536 @kindex --long-plt
6537 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6538 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6539 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6540 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6541
6542 @ifclear GENERIC
6543 @lowersections
6544 @end ifclear
6545 @end ifset
6546
6547 @ifset HPPA
6548 @ifclear GENERIC
6549 @raisesections
6550 @end ifclear
6551
6552 @node HPPA ELF32
6553 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6554 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6555 @kindex --multi-subspace
6556 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6557 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6558 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6559 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6560 multiple sub-spaces.
6561
6562 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6563 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6564 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6565 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6566 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6567 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6568 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6569 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6570 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6571 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6572 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6573 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6574 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6575 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6576 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6577 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6578
6579 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6580 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6581 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6582 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6583
6584 @ifclear GENERIC
6585 @lowersections
6586 @end ifclear
6587 @end ifset
6588
6589 @ifset M68K
6590 @ifclear GENERIC
6591 @raisesections
6592 @end ifclear
6593
6594 @node M68K
6595 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6596
6597 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6598 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6599 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6600 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6601 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6602 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6603 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6604 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6605 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6606 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6607 support such GOTs.
6608 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6609 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6610 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6611 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6612
6613 @ifclear GENERIC
6614 @lowersections
6615 @end ifclear
6616 @end ifset
6617
6618 @ifset MIPS
6619 @ifclear GENERIC
6620 @raisesections
6621 @end ifclear
6622
6623 @node MIPS
6624 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6625
6626 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6627 @kindex --insn32
6628 @kindex --no-insn32
6629 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6630 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6631 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6632 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6633 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6634 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6635
6636 @ifclear GENERIC
6637 @lowersections
6638 @end ifclear
6639 @end ifset
6640
6641 @ifset MMIX
6642 @ifclear GENERIC
6643 @raisesections
6644 @end ifclear
6645
6646 @node MMIX
6647 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6648 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6649 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6650 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6651 can translate between the two formats.
6652
6653 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6654 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6655 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6656 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6657 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6658 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6659 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6660 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6661
6662 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6663 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6664 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6665 of a section.
6666
6667 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6668 are left out from an mmo file.
6669
6670 @ifclear GENERIC
6671 @lowersections
6672 @end ifclear
6673 @end ifset
6674
6675 @ifset MSP430
6676 @ifclear GENERIC
6677 @raisesections
6678 @end ifclear
6679
6680 @node MSP430
6681 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6682 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6683 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6684 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6685
6686 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6687 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6688
6689 @table @code
6690 @item @samp{.vectors}
6691 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6692
6693 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6694 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6695 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6696
6697 @item @samp{.infomem}
6698 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6699 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6700
6701 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6702 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6703 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6704
6705 @item @samp{.noinit}
6706 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6707
6708 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6709 @end table
6710
6711 @ifclear GENERIC
6712 @lowersections
6713 @end ifclear
6714 @end ifset
6715
6716 @ifset NDS32
6717 @ifclear GENERIC
6718 @raisesections
6719 @end ifclear
6720
6721 @node NDS32
6722 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6723 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6724 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6725 relaxes objects according to these options.
6726
6727 @table @code
6728 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6729 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6730
6731 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6732 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6733
6734 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6735 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6736
6737 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6738 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6739
6740 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6741 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6742
6743 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6744 Update the existing EX9 table.
6745
6746 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6747 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6748
6749 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6750 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6751
6752 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6753 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6754
6755 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6756 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6757 @end table
6758
6759 @ifclear GENERIC
6760 @lowersections
6761 @end ifclear
6762 @end ifset
6763
6764 @ifset NIOSII
6765 @ifclear GENERIC
6766 @raisesections
6767 @end ifclear
6768
6769 @node Nios II
6770 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6771 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6772 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6773
6774 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6775 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6776 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6777 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6778 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6779 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6780 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6781 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6782 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6783 larger than 256MB.
6784
6785 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6786 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6787 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6788 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6789 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6790 register as a temporary.
6791
6792 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6793 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6794 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6795
6796 @ifclear GENERIC
6797 @lowersections
6798 @end ifclear
6799 @end ifset
6800
6801 @ifset POWERPC
6802 @ifclear GENERIC
6803 @raisesections
6804 @end ifclear
6805
6806 @node PowerPC ELF32
6807 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6808 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6809 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6810 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6811 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6812 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6813 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6814 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6815 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6816 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6817 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6818 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6819 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6820
6821 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6822 @table @option
6823 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6824 @kindex --bss-plt
6825 @item --bss-plt
6826 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6827 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6828 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6829 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6830 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6831 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6832 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6833 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6834
6835 @kindex --secure-plt
6836 @item --secure-plt
6837 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6838 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6839 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6840 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6841 style BSS PLT.
6842
6843 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6844 @kindex --sdata-got
6845 @item --sdata-got
6846 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6847 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6848 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6849 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6850 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6851 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6852 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6853 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6854 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6855 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6856 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6857 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6858
6859 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6860 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6861 @item --emit-stub-syms
6862 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6863 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6864
6865 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6866 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6867 @item --no-tls-optimize
6868 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6869 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6870 disable the optimization.
6871 @end table
6872
6873 @ifclear GENERIC
6874 @lowersections
6875 @end ifclear
6876 @end ifset
6877
6878 @ifset POWERPC64
6879 @ifclear GENERIC
6880 @raisesections
6881 @end ifclear
6882
6883 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6884 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6885
6886 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6887 @table @option
6888 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6889 @kindex --stub-group-size
6890 @item --stub-group-size
6891 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6892 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6893 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6894 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6895 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6896 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6897 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6898 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6899 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6900 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6901 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6902 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6903 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6904 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6905
6906 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6907 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6908 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6909 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6910
6911 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6912 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6913 @item --emit-stub-syms
6914 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6915 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6916
6917 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6918 @kindex --dotsyms
6919 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6920 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6921 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6922 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6923 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6924 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6925 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6926 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6927 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6928 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6929 feature.
6930
6931 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6932 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6933 @item --no-tls-optimize
6934 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6935 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6936 disable the optimization.
6937
6938 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6939 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6940 @item --no-opd-optimize
6941 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6942 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6943 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6944 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6945
6946 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6947 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6948 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6949 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6950 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6951 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6952 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6953
6954 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6955 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6956 @item --no-toc-optimize
6957 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6958 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6959 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6960 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6961 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6962 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6963 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6964 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6965 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6966 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6967 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6968 optimization.
6969
6970 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6971 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6972 @item --no-multi-toc
6973 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6974 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6975 where TOC
6976 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6977 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6978 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6979 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6980 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6981 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6982 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6983 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6984
6985 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6986 @kindex --no-toc-sort
6987 @item --no-toc-sort
6988 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6989 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6990 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6991 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6992 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6993 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6994 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6995 off this feature.
6996
6997 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6998 @kindex --plt-align
6999 @kindex --no-plt-align
7000 @item --plt-align
7001 @itemx --no-plt-align
7002 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7003 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7004 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7005 are packed tightly.
7006
7007 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7008 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7009 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7010 @item --plt-static-chain
7011 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7012 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7013 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7014 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7015
7016 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7017 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7018 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7019 @item --plt-thread-safe
7020 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7021 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7022 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7023 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7024 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7025 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7026 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7027 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7028 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7029 default behaviour.
7030 @end table
7031
7032 @ifclear GENERIC
7033 @lowersections
7034 @end ifclear
7035 @end ifset
7036
7037 @ifset SPU
7038 @ifclear GENERIC
7039 @raisesections
7040 @end ifclear
7041
7042 @node SPU ELF
7043 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7044
7045 @cindex SPU ELF options
7046 @table @option
7047
7048 @cindex SPU plugins
7049 @kindex --plugin
7050 @item --plugin
7051 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7052
7053 @cindex SPU overlays
7054 @kindex --no-overlays
7055 @item --no-overlays
7056 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7057 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7058 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7059 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7060
7061 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7062 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7063 @item --emit-stub-syms
7064 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7065 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7066
7067 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7068 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7069 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7070 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7071 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7072 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7073
7074 @cindex SPU local store size
7075 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7076 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7077 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7078 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7079 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7080
7081 @cindex SPU
7082 @kindex --stack-analysis
7083 @item --stack-analysis
7084 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7085 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7086 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7087 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7088 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7089 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7090 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7091 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7092 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7093 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7094 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7095 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7096 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7097 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7098 and calls will be given.
7099
7100 @cindex SPU
7101 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7102 @item --emit-stack-syms
7103 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7104 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7105 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7106 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7107 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7108 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7109 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7110 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7111 @end table
7112
7113 @ifclear GENERIC
7114 @lowersections
7115 @end ifclear
7116 @end ifset
7117
7118 @ifset TICOFF
7119 @ifclear GENERIC
7120 @raisesections
7121 @end ifclear
7122
7123 @node TI COFF
7124 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7125 @cindex TI COFF versions
7126 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7127 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7128 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7129 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7130 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7131 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7132
7133 @ifclear GENERIC
7134 @lowersections
7135 @end ifclear
7136 @end ifset
7137
7138 @ifset WIN32
7139 @ifclear GENERIC
7140 @raisesections
7141 @end ifclear
7142
7143 @node WIN32
7144 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7145
7146 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7147 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7148 command line options mentioned here.
7149
7150 @table @emph
7151 @cindex import libraries
7152 @item import libraries
7153 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7154 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7155 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7156 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7157 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7158 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7159
7160 @item exporting DLL symbols
7161 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7162 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7163
7164 @table @emph
7165 @item using auto-export functionality
7166 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7167 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7168 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7169
7170 @itemize
7171 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7172 @item --exclude-symbols
7173 @item --exclude-libs
7174 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7175 @item --version-script
7176 @end itemize
7177
7178 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7179 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7180 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7181 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7182 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7183 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7184 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7185 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7186
7187 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7188 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7189 if either of the following are true:
7190
7191 @itemize
7192 @item A DEF file is used.
7193 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7194 @end itemize
7195
7196 @item using a DEF file
7197 @cindex using a DEF file
7198 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7199 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7200 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7201 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7202 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7203
7204 @example
7205 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7206 @end example
7207
7208 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7209 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7210
7211 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7212
7213 @example
7214 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7215
7216 EXPORTS
7217 foo
7218 bar
7219 _bar = bar
7220 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7221 var1 DATA
7222 doo = foo == foo2
7223 eoo DATA == var1
7224 @end example
7225
7226 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7227 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7228 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7229 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7230 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7231 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7232 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7233 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7234 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7235
7236 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7237 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7238 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7239
7240 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7241 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7242 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7243 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7244
7245 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7246 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7247 non-default base address for the image.
7248
7249 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7250 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7251 filename specified on the command line.
7252
7253 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7254
7255 @example
7256 EXPORTS
7257 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7258 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7259 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7260 @end example
7261
7262 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7263 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7264 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7265 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7266 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7267 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7268 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7269
7270 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7271
7272 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7273 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7274 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7275 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7276 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7277
7278 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7279 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7280 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7281 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7282
7283 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7284 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7285 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7286 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7287 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7288 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7289 application will behave unexpectedly.
7290
7291 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7292 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7293 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7294 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7295 the DLL without an import library.
7296
7297 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7298 other DEF file statements
7299
7300 @cindex creating a DEF file
7301 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7302 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7303
7304 @item Using decorations
7305 @cindex Using decorations
7306 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7307 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7308 declared as:
7309
7310 @example
7311 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7312 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7313 @end example
7314
7315 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7316 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7317 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7318 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7319
7320 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7321 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7322 instead:
7323
7324 @example
7325 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7326 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7327 @end example
7328
7329 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7330 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7331 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7332 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7333 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7334 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7335 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7336 information.
7337 @end table
7338
7339 @cindex automatic data imports
7340 @item automatic data imports
7341 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7342 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7343 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7344 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7345 code to these platforms, especially for large
7346 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7347 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7348 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7349 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7350 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7351 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7352 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7353 trigger the feature's use.
7354
7355 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7356 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7357
7358 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7359 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7360
7361 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7362 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7363 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7364 below.
7365
7366 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7367 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7368 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7369 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7370 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7371 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7372 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7373 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7374 references.
7375
7376 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7377 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7378 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7379 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7380 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7381 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7382 run without error on an older system.
7383
7384 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7385 enabled as needed.
7386
7387 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7388 @item direct linking to a dll
7389 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7390 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7391 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7392 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7393 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7394 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7395 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7396 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7397 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7398 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7399
7400 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7401 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7402 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7403 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7404 select the dll instead of an import library.
7405
7406
7407 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7408 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7409
7410 @example
7411 libxxx.dll.a
7412 xxx.dll.a
7413 libxxx.a
7414 xxx.lib
7415 cygxxx.dll (*)
7416 libxxx.dll
7417 xxx.dll
7418 @end example
7419
7420 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7421
7422 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7423 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7424 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7425 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7426 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7427
7428 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7429 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7430 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7431 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7432 could coexist on the same machine.
7433
7434 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7435 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7436 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7437
7438 @example
7439 bin/
7440 cygxxx.dll
7441 lib/
7442 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7443 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7444 @end example
7445
7446 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7447 done two ways:
7448
7449 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7450 @example
7451 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7452 @end example
7453
7454 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7455 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7456 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7457 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7458
7459 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7460 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7461 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7462 making the app/dll.
7463
7464 @example
7465 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7466 @end example
7467
7468 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7469
7470 @example
7471 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7472 @end example
7473
7474 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7475 perfectly legal
7476
7477 @example
7478 bin/
7479 cygxxx-5.dll
7480 lib/
7481 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7482 @end example
7483
7484 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7485 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7486 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7487
7488 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7489 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7490
7491 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7492 work with auto-imported data.
7493
7494 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7495 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7496 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7497 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7498 possible to do this without an import lib.
7499
7500 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7501 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7502 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7503 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7504
7505 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7506 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7507 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7508 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7509 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7510 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7511 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7512
7513 @item symbol aliasing
7514 @table @emph
7515 @item adding additional names
7516 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7517 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7518 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7519 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7520 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7521
7522 @example
7523 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7524
7525 EXPORTS
7526 foo
7527 _foo = foo
7528 @end example
7529
7530 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7531
7532 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7533 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7534
7535 @example
7536 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7537 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7538 @end example
7539
7540 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7541 symbols.
7542
7543 @item renaming symbols
7544 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7545 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7546 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7547 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7548 created). In the following example:
7549
7550 @example
7551 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7552
7553 EXPORTS
7554 _foo = foo
7555 @end example
7556
7557 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7558 @samp{_foo}.
7559 @end table
7560
7561 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7562 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7563 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7564 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7565 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7566 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7567 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7568 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7569 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7570 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7571 which is probably not what you wanted.
7572
7573 @cindex weak externals
7574 @item weak externals
7575 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7576 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7577 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7578 are three variants of weak externals:
7579 @itemize
7580 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7581 called lazy externals.
7582 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7583 This form is not presently implemented.
7584 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7585 implemented.
7586 @end itemize
7587 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7588 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7589 uses a default value.
7590
7591 @cindex aligned common symbols
7592 @item aligned common symbols
7593 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7594 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7595 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7596 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7597 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7598 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7599 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7600 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7601
7602 @end table
7603
7604 @ifclear GENERIC
7605 @lowersections
7606 @end ifclear
7607 @end ifset
7608
7609 @ifset XTENSA
7610 @ifclear GENERIC
7611 @raisesections
7612 @end ifclear
7613
7614 @node Xtensa
7615 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7616
7617 @cindex Xtensa processors
7618 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7619 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7620 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7621 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7622 example, with the command:
7623
7624 @smallexample
7625 SECTIONS
7626 @{
7627 .text : @{
7628 *(.literal .text)
7629 @}
7630 @}
7631 @end smallexample
7632
7633 @noindent
7634 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7635 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7636 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7637 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7638 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7639 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7640 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7641
7642 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7643 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7644 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7645 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7646 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7647 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7648 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7649 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7650 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7651 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7652 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7653 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7654
7655 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7656 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7657 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7658 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7659 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7660 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7661 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7662 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7663 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7664 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7665 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7666 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7667 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7668 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7669
7670 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7671 control the linker:
7672
7673 @cindex Xtensa options
7674 @table @option
7675 @item --size-opt
7676 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7677 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7678 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7679 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7680 preserve the correctness of the code.
7681 @end table
7682
7683 @ifclear GENERIC
7684 @lowersections
7685 @end ifclear
7686 @end ifset
7687
7688 @ifclear SingleFormat
7689 @node BFD
7690 @chapter BFD
7691
7692 @cindex back end
7693 @cindex object file management
7694 @cindex object formats available
7695 @kindex objdump -i
7696 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7697 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7698 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7699 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7700 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7701 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7702 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7703 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7704 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7705
7706 @cindex BFD requirements
7707 @cindex requirements for BFD
7708 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7709 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7710 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7711 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7712 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7713 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7714 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7715
7716 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7717 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7718 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7719 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7720
7721 @menu
7722 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7723 @end menu
7724
7725 @node BFD outline
7726 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7727 @cindex opening object files
7728 @include bfdsumm.texi
7729 @end ifclear
7730
7731 @node Reporting Bugs
7732 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7733 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7734 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7735
7736 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7737
7738 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7739 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7740 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7741 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7742 @command{ld}.
7743
7744 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7745 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7746
7747 @menu
7748 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7749 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7750 @end menu
7751
7752 @node Bug Criteria
7753 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7754 @cindex bug criteria
7755
7756 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7757
7758 @itemize @bullet
7759 @cindex fatal signal
7760 @cindex linker crash
7761 @cindex crash of linker
7762 @item
7763 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7764 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7765
7766 @cindex error on valid input
7767 @item
7768 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7769
7770 @cindex invalid input
7771 @item
7772 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7773 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7774 object files are correct.
7775
7776 @item
7777 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7778 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7779 @end itemize
7780
7781 @node Bug Reporting
7782 @section How to Report Bugs
7783 @cindex bug reports
7784 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7785
7786 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7787 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7788 recommend you contact that organization first.
7789
7790 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7791 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7792 distribution.
7793
7794 @ifset BUGURL
7795 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7796 @value{BUGURL}.
7797 @end ifset
7798
7799 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7800 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7801 fact or leave it out, state it!
7802
7803 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7804 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7805 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7806 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7807 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7808 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7809 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7810 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7811 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7812 and the most helpful.
7813
7814 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7815 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7816 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7817
7818 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7819 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7820 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7821 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7822
7823 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7824
7825 @itemize @bullet
7826 @item
7827 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7828 the @samp{--version} argument.
7829
7830 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7831 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7832
7833 @item
7834 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7835 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7836
7837 @item
7838 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7839 version number.
7840
7841 @item
7842 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7843 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7844
7845 @item
7846 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7847 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7848 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7849 sufficient.
7850
7851 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7852 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7853
7854 @item
7855 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7856 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7857 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7858 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7859 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7860 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7861 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7862 attachments are best.
7863
7864 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7865 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7866 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7867 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7868 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7869
7870 @item
7871 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7872 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7873
7874 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7875 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7876 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7877 a chance to make a mistake.
7878
7879 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7880 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7881 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7882 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7883 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7884 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7885 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7886 any conclusion from our observations.
7887
7888 @item
7889 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7890 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7891 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7892 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7893 context, not by line number.
7894
7895 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7896 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7897 @end itemize
7898
7899 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7900
7901 @itemize @bullet
7902 @item
7903 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7904
7905 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7906 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7907 changes will not affect it.
7908
7909 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7910 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7911 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7912 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7913
7914 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7915 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7916 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7917 less time, and so on.
7918
7919 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7920 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7921
7922 @item
7923 A patch for the bug.
7924
7925 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7926 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7927 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7928 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7929
7930 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7931 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7932 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7933 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7934 fixed.
7935
7936 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7937 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7938 help us to understand.
7939
7940 @item
7941 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7942
7943 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7944 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7945 @end itemize
7946
7947 @node MRI
7948 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7949 @cindex MRI compatibility
7950 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7951 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7952 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7953 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7954 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7955 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7956 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7957
7958 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7959 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7960 features to make use of them.
7961
7962 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7963 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7964
7965 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7966 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7967 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7968 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7969 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7970
7971 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7972
7973 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7974 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7975 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7976
7977 @table @code
7978 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7979 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7980 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7981 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7982 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7983 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7984 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7985 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7986 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7987 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7988 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7989
7990 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7991 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7992 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7993 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7994
7995 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7996
7997 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7998 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7999 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8000 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8001
8002 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8003 @item BASE @var{expression}
8004 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8005 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8006
8007 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8008 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8009 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8010 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8011
8012 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8013 @item END
8014 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8015
8016 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8017 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8018 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8019 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8020
8021 @enumerate
8022 @item
8023 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8024
8025 @item
8026 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8027
8028 @item
8029 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8030 @samp{COFF}
8031 @end enumerate
8032
8033 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8034 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8035 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8036 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8037
8038 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8039 same line, with no change in its effect.
8040
8041 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8042 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8043 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8044 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8045 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8046 command line.
8047
8048 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8049 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8050 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8051 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8052 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8053
8054 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8055 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8056 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8057 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8058 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8059 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8060 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8061 file, in the order specified.
8062
8063 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8064 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8065 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8066 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8067 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8068 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8069
8070 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8071 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8072 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8073 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8074 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8075 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8076 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8077 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8078 @end table
8079
8080 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8081 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8082 @include fdl.texi
8083
8084 @node LD Index
8085 @unnumbered LD Index
8086
8087 @printindex cp
8088
8089 @tex
8090 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8091 % meantime:
8092 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8093 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8094 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8095 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8096 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8097 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8098 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8099 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8100 \page\colophon
8101 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8102 @end tex
8103
8104 @bye
This page took 0.225516 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.